RISO EZ591 Owner manual

RISO EZ591 Owner manual
REG-ML_EN.book Page 1 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Riso shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of this manual.
As we are constantly improving our products, the machine may differ in some respects
from the illustrations used in this manual.
Riso shall not be liable for any direct, incidental, or consequential damages of any nature,
or losses or expenses resulting from the use of this product or included manuals.
BCaution:
• Make sure to read the important operational safety information.
• Store this manual close-by, and fully acquaint yourself with the printing machine.
is a registered trademark of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION in Japan and other countries.
is a trademark of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION.
is a trademark of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION.
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® and Adobe® Reader® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
- The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Copyright © 2012 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION
1
REG-ML_EN.book Page 2 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Contents
Welcome to the EZ5 Series Model ...................................................................................... 7
About The User’s Guides .................................................................................................... 7
Icons Used in This Manual .................................................................................................. 8
Before Starting to Use
10
Safety Guide - Installation ................................................................................................. 10
Installation .........................................................................................................................10
Power connection ...............................................................................................................10
Safety Guide - Handling and Operation............................................................................. 11
Operation Environment.......................................................................................................11
Machine Handling...............................................................................................................11
USB Flash Drive .................................................................................................................12
Consumables......................................................................................................................12
Ink Handling........................................................................................................................12
Location of Caution Label..................................................................................................12
Connection with a Computer ............................................................................................. 13
Connection Method ............................................................................................................13
Software Installation ...........................................................................................................14
Paper Recommendations .................................................................................................. 15
Size and Weight Restrictions..............................................................................................15
Tips for Better Paper Feeding ............................................................................................16
Storing Environment ...........................................................................................................16
Originals ............................................................................................................................ 17
Size and Weight Restrictions..............................................................................................17
Maximum Printing Areas and Margins................................................................................18
Materials Not to Be Printed ................................................................................................18
Getting Acquainted
20
Function and Name of Each Part ...................................................................................... 20
Control Panel..................................................................................................................... 22
Display............................................................................................................................... 24
The Screens and their Various Stages ...............................................................................24
About Modes ......................................................................................................................26
Basic Screen Layout...........................................................................................................29
Basic Process .....................................................................................................................31
2
REG-ML_EN.book Page 3 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Contents
Basic Operations
32
Preparing to Print............................................................................................................... 32
Setting up the Paper Feed Tray and Loading Paper ..........................................................32
Setting up the Paper Receiving Tray ..................................................................................35
Placing the original ............................................................................................................ 37
When placing on the Glass Platen .....................................................................................37
When placing in the ADF unit (Option) ...............................................................................37
Printing from a Paper Document or Book.......................................................................... 39
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] ............................................. 44
Printing Computer Data [Direct Print] .................................................................................45
Printing USB Data [USB Job List].......................................................................................49
Changing Output Directions ...............................................................................................52
Changing Stop Timing ........................................................................................................54
Functions for Master-Making
56
Selecting Image Processing Mode [Image] ...................................................................... 56
Selecting Scanning Contrast for the Original [Contrast] .................................................. 58
Enlarging/Reducing Originals [Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Free] [Zoom] ........................ 59
Enlargement and Reduction by Standard Ratio [Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Auto]............60
Enlargement/Reduction of a Changed Aspect Ration [Free]..............................................61
Enlarging and Reducing with the Zoom Function [Zoom] ..................................................62
Using Custom-Sized Paper [Paper]................................................................................... 63
Automatic Printing [Auto-Process]..................................................................................... 64
Processing Photos with Dot Screen [Dot Process] ........................................................... 65
Adjusting Photo Contrast [Contrast Adj] ............................................................................ 66
Adjusting Photo Gradation [Tone Curve]........................................................................... 67
Saving Ink [Ink Saving] ..................................................................................................... 68
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] ..................................... 69
Original Orientation and Print Results ................................................................................70
Margin.................................................................................................................................73
Orientation of Print Paper ...................................................................................................73
Multi-Up Interval .................................................................................................................73
2 Up Operation ...................................................................................................................74
Operation for Multi-Up Printing ...........................................................................................76
Operation for Multi-Up Tickets ............................................................................................78
Printing from Bound Documents [Book Shadow] ............................................................. 81
Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and Printing [Top Margin] ..................................... 83
Adjusting the Side Margins of the Master [Side Margin].................................................... 85
Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master [Preview] ............................................. 87
Actions Available on the Preview Screen ...........................................................................88
Operation for Preview .........................................................................................................88
Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum Printing Area [Max. Scan] ........................... 90
3
REG-ML_EN.book Page 4 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Contents
Functions for Printing
92
Changing the Print Speed [Print Speed Adjustment]......................................................... 92
Adjusting the Print Density [Print Density Adjustment] ...................................................... 93
Adjusting the Print Position [Print Position Adjustment] .................................................... 94
Vertical (Up/Down) Adjustment ..........................................................................................94
Horizontal (Left/Right) Adjustment......................................................................................95
Printing Proof Copies [Proof] ............................................................................................. 96
Extending the drying time [Interval] ................................................................................... 97
Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types
[Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl] .......................................................................... 98
Setting the Jump Wing Control [Jump Wing Control] .........................................................99
Saving settings and Renaming the Parameter Names in the Parameter List ..................100
Retrieving Settings from the Parameter List .....................................................................102
Making changes to Special Paper Ctrl Setting ................................................................103
Clearing Special Paper Ctrl Settings ................................................................................104
Advanced Features
106
Setting Up User Management [User Management]......................................................... 106
Selecting Recognition and Identification System..............................................................109
Setting Up the Management Level ...................................................................................111
Registering Administrator/Users .......................................................................................112
Changing Administrator/User Registration .......................................................................119
Clearing User Registration ...............................................................................................120
Renaming Groups ............................................................................................................121
Reset All User Counters ...................................................................................................122
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] ...................................................................... 123
How to Program Print .......................................................................................................125
Setting Up for Programed Printing ...................................................................................126
Saving Programs .............................................................................................................128
Renaming a Program .......................................................................................................129
Retrieving a Program........................................................................................................131
Clearing Programs ...........................................................................................................132
Making changes to Stored Programs ...............................................................................133
Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory] ................................................................... 134
Storing Job Memory .........................................................................................................135
Renaming a Job Memory .................................................................................................136
Retrieving a Job Memory and Printing .............................................................................138
Clearing Job Memory .......................................................................................................140
Protecting Confidential Documents [Confidential] .......................................................... 141
Extending the Reserve Period [Reservation] .................................................................. 142
Idling Action [Idling Action] ............................................................................................. 143
Reproducing the Master [Renew Page][Auto Page Renewal]......................................... 144
Using Page Renewal ........................................................................................................145
Using Auto Page Renewal................................................................................................146
Proof and Print (with the ADF unit (Option) installed) [ADF Semi-Auto] ......................... 147
Showing Usage Status [Meter Display] .......................................................................... 149
Rotating the Original 180 Degrees to Make a Master [Rotate]........................................ 150
4
REG-ML_EN.book Page 5 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Contents
Checking User Counters [ID Counter Report] ................................................................. 151
Outputting the Counter Report .........................................................................................152
Setting Up the Monthly Reminder.....................................................................................153
Customizing the Direct Access Area [My Direct Access] ................................................ 155
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] ................................................................................ 157
Configurable Functions.....................................................................................................157
Customizing the Default Settings .....................................................................................165
Setting Up Direct Access Area and Selections Tab [Direct Access Entry] [Selections Entry] ......... 168
Registering a Custom Paper Size [Custom Paper Entry] ................................................ 170
Entering sizes and changing names.................................................................................170
Deleting a Custom Paper Size .........................................................................................172
Keeping Masters Secure After Printing [Protect] ............................................................. 173
Preventing Leaks of Masters After Creation or Disposal [Protect] ...................................174
Storing Original Data and Use Method
176
Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode) .................................................. 178
Scanning an Original ........................................................................................................178
Setting Data Information ...................................................................................................180
Specifying Stored Size .....................................................................................................182
Retrieving Stored Data and Printing [Storage Memory][USB Job List]............................ 183
Retrieving Stored Data .....................................................................................................183
Changing the Data Order .................................................................................................185
Using the Storage Retrieve Screen/USB Job List Retrieve Screen .................................186
Overlaying Stored Data onto a Print Job [Overlay].......................................................... 187
Copying/Moving Stored Data........................................................................................... 189
When using a Linked Printer
192
Print Functions for Using Linked Printers ........................................................................ 192
Auto-Link Function............................................................................................................192
Link Mode Function ..........................................................................................................192
Setting up a Linked Printer [Link Properties] .................................................................. 193
Setting up a Linked Printer ...............................................................................................193
Linked Printer Setup List ..................................................................................................194
Printing Scanned Original from a Linked Printer [Link Mode].......................................... 197
Using Optional Functions on a Linked Printer ................................................................. 199
Configurable Functions.....................................................................................................200
Duplex Printing [Duplex] ................................................................................................. 202
Using the Glass Platen or Auto Document Feeder AF-VI ................................................202
5
REG-ML_EN.book Page 6 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Contents
Replacing Consumables
206
Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables............................................................... 206
Replacing the Master Roll ............................................................................................... 208
Replacing the Ink Cartridge ............................................................................................ 211
Emptying the Master Disposal Box ................................................................................. 213
Replacing the Print Drum (Cylinder) (Color (colour) Change) ......................................... 215
Removing the Print Drum (Cylinder).................................................................................215
Installing the Print Drum (Cylinder)...................................................................................217
Disposal of Depleted Consumables ................................................................................ 218
Maintenance
220
Cleaning .......................................................................................................................... 220
Thermal Print Head ..........................................................................................................221
Glass Platen and Platen Cover Pad .................................................................................221
Scanner Glass and White Roller of ADF unit (Option) .....................................................222
Pressure Roller .................................................................................................................222
The Exterior ......................................................................................................................223
Troubleshooting
224
When a Message Displays .............................................................................................. 224
Error Message Layout ......................................................................................................224
Pop-Up Message Layout ..................................................................................................232
Consumable Information Screen ......................................................................................239
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 242
Appendix
250
Optional Accessories....................................................................................................... 250
Specifications .................................................................................................................. 251
Index................................................................................................................................ 254
6
REG-ML_EN.book Page 7 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Welcome to the EZ5 Series Model
Thank you for your purchase of this printing machine.
The EZ5 series is a digital duplicator with an LCD display. It features an easy-to-use Touch Screen which displays
only the relevant buttons for any given task. With an interactive guidance system, highly-sophisticated printer settings
can be made with ease.
About The User’s Guides
This machine comes with the following four user’s guides.
‹ RISO EZ591/571/531 User’s Guide (this manual)
This user’s guide explains basic printer operations, handy tips, and how to set up the high-speed print function. It
also contains user cautions, information on storing and changing consumables, and troubleshooting procedures.
It also contains an explanation for using “Link Mode” when an optional linked printer is attached.
‹ RISO Editor User’s Guide
This user’s guide explains the RISO Editor functions.
‹ RISO Printer Driver User’s Guide (included as a PDF file in the attached CD-ROM)
This user’s guide explains the procedures for printing from a computer.
‹ RISO Utility Software User’s Guide (included as a PDF file in the attached CD-ROM)
This user’s guide explains how to use the software of the “RISO USB PRINT MANAGER” and “RISO COPY
COUNT VIEWER”.
Welcome to the EZ5 Series Model 7
REG-ML_EN.book Page 8 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Icons Used in This Manual
The following icons are used in this manual.
About the notation
The following icons are used throughout the document.
AWARNING:
BCaution:
Ignoring this warning could cause death or serious injury.
Important!:
Indicates items that require special attention or that are prohibited actions.
Read carefully and follow the directions as instructed.
Note:
Gives you useful information.
Tip:
Gives you additional hints for more convenience.
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.
Indicates a reference page.
[
]
Indicates a button or item name on the LCD display.
Indicates which button to touch on the LCD display.
Indicates the original document.
Indicates printed copies.
8 Icons Used in This Manual
REG-ML_EN.book Page 9 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
The notation for Operational Instructions and Function Descriptions
The following conventions are used to explain functions and operations.
1) Chapter Title
2) Operation Procedure
3) Display
Shows the screen as seen on each step.
The operational procedures are outlined in steps. Follow
these steps.
About the content of this manual and the illustrations
• The illustrations included in this document depict the EZ571A model in most cases.
• Displays are illustrated as if currently activated. Some buttons presented in this manual may not be available by
default setting, or when the optional device is not installed.
• The optional Auto Document Feeder AF-VI is referred to as the “ADF unit (Option)”.
• The optional Document Storage Card DM-128CF and Document Storage Card DM-512CF are collectively
described as the “Document Storage Card”.
Icons Used in This Manual 9
REG-ML_EN.book Page 10 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Safety Guide - Installation
This section describes the precautions to be observed when installing the machine. Read this section before installing the machine.
Note:
• Your dealer (or authorized service representative) will help you to determine a proper location for the machine at
the time of delivery.
Installation
AWARNING:
• Place the machine on the dedicated stand for this model or on a flat and stable surface (maximum of 10 mm
(3/8 inches) differential allowed). Injury might occur if the machine falls.
• Install the machine in a well-ventilated area. Failure to do so may result in serious health problems.
BCaution:
• Install the machine near the electrical outlet to avoid using an extension cord between the machine and the electrical
outlet. If an extension cord is absolutely required, do not use one longer than 5 m (15 feet).
• Allow at least 10 cm (4 inches) or more of clearance behind the machine so that you can unplug the machine in
case of technical difficulties.
• Keep the machine away from dusty environments. Failure to do so may result in fire.
Important!:
• Avoid installing the machine in the locations listed below. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to machine failure.
– Locations with exposure to direct sunlight, such as locations close to windows (Curtain all windows that might
expose the machine to direct sunlight)
– Locations that are subject to sudden changes in temperature
– Extremely hot and humid locations or cold and dry locations
– Heated locations
– Locations exposed to direct cold air, direct hot air, or direct radiant heat
– Locations of poor permeability and ventilation
Power connection
AWARNING:
• Do not overload the electrical outlet or extension cord, nor damage the power cord by placing heavy objects on it
or pulling or bending it. This can result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull the power cord but hold the plug itself when unplugging it. This can damage the cord and result in fire
or electric shock.
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord if your hands are wet. This can result in electric shock.
BCaution:
• Pull out the power cord plug from the electrical outlet more than once a year and clean the prongs of the plug and
their surroundings. Dust collected on these areas can result in fire.
Important!:
• Check the power cord and plug for poor connections. Plug the power cord securely into a nearby electrical outlet.
• Be sure to turn off the POWER switch when connecting or disconnecting a cable.
• Do not touch the POWER switch on the upper part of the AC inlet (power cord connection). Changing the POWER
switch setting by mistake will cause damage.
10 Safety Guide - Installation
REG-ML_EN.book Page 11 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Safety Guide - Handling and Operation
This section describes the precautions to be observed when handling the machine. Read this section before operating the machine.
Operation Environment
Important!:
• Operate the machine under the following appropriate environment conditions.
Temperature range: 15°C to 30°C (59°F to 86°F)
Humidity range: 40% to 70% (noncondensing)
Machine Handling
AWARNING:
• Do not place water containers or metallic objects on the machine. Fire or electric shock may occur if water or metallic objects fall into the machine.
• Do not use combustible spray and flammable solvent near the machine.
If sprayed gas and flammable solvent contact electronic components inside the machine, fire or electric shock
might occur.
• Do not insert any metallic material or flammable substance into the machine through any opening. This can result
in fire or electric shock.
• Do not remove machine covers. Exposing internal parts may result in electric shock.
• Do not disassemble or rebuild the machine by yourself. This can result in fire or electric shock.
• If the machine emits excessive heat, smoke or foul odor, immediately turn off the POWER, unplug the power cord
and contact your service representative. Failure to do so can result in fire or electric shock.
• If something drops inside the machine, immediately turn off the POWER, unplug the power cord and contact your
service representative. Failure to do so can result in fire or electric shock.
• Never stick your hands or fingers in the openings of the machine during operation.
• Keep loose clothing or long hair away from moving parts to avoid becoming entangled.
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. The objects might fall and cause injury.
• Contact your service representative before moving the machine.
BCaution:
• Never insert fingers, etc. into the openings around Paper Feed Tray and Paper Receiving Tray. This can result in
injury.
• Because ink may have stuck to areas around the Print Drum (Cylinder) or inside the machine when the Print Drum
(Cylinder) was removed, be careful not to contact them with your hands or clothes.
When ink has stuck to your hands, etc., wash it off with detergent as soon as possible.
• When you remove paper by inserting a hand inside the machine, be careful not to touch the paper separation hook.
Because the tip of paper separation hook is sharp, it might cause injury.
• Do not open any covers or move the machine during operation.
• Unplug the power cord, if you do not use the machine for a long time.
• The machine has precision parts and driving parts inside. Do not handle the machine in other ways than described
in this manual.
• Do not apply any shock to the machine.
• Do not stand the Print Drum (Cylinder) vertically. Doing so may pollute the floor, etc.
Important!:
• Do not unplug the power cord or turn off the power during operation.
• Be sure to open and close all machine covers gently.
Safety Guide - Handling and Operation 11
REG-ML_EN.book Page 12 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
USB Flash Drive
Important!:
• Use a USB Flash Drive to store large volumes of data. Depending on the types of USB Flash Drive, the machine
does not work properly.
• When connecting or disconnecting the USB Flash Drive, follow the proper procedures.
• We cannot guarantee data saved in the USB Flash Drive against loss caused by accidents or unforeseen events.
We recommend that you use your computer to make back-up copies of any important documents.
Consumables
Important!:
• For ink and Master Roll, it is recommended to use the products specified by RISO.
• Store consumables such as Master Roll and ink properly.
Do not store consumables in the following places:
– Locations that are subject to direct sunlight or bright locations that are close to windows
(If there is no other choice, curtain the window.)
– Locations that are subject to rapid changes in temperature
– Extremely hot and humid locations or extremely cold and dry locations
Ink Handling
BCaution:
•
•
•
•
•
•
If ink gets into your eyes, flush it out immediately with plenty of water. If irritation continues, seek medical attention.
If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off thoroughly using soap.
Allow plenty of ventilation during printing.
If you feel unwell during use, seek medical advice.
Only use the ink for printing purposes.
Keep the ink out of the reach of children.
Location of
Caution Label
This machine has a
caution label meant to ensure safe operation.
Follow the indication of the label and use the machine safely.
12 Safety Guide - Handling and Operation
REG-ML_EN.book Page 13 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Connection with a Computer
You can directly send data from a connected computer to the machine as an original for printing. Because digital data
itself is used for making a master, the finish of prints becomes outstanding.
Connection Method
‹ One-to-one connection with a
Windows PC
• Cable:
USB cable
3m (10 feet) Hi-Speed USB
USB port on the machine
USB
port
Important!:
• Before making the USB connections,
turn on both the machine and computer,
and wait until the initial screen is
displayed.
• The maximum allowable voltage for
USB connector input and output is 5 V.
• For the USB connections, use a
commercially available USB cable (that
conforms to the USB 2.0 standard).
USB port on
your computer
‹ Network connections
• Cable:
Ethernet cable
Shielded cable that supports 10BASE-T
or 100BASE-TX
Important!:
• Before making the Ethernet
connections, turn off both the machine
and computer.
Note:
• The RISO Network Card (Option) is
required.
• If the optional network interface card
“RISO Network Card” is installed, the
machine can be connected with a
Macintosh computer. For details, see
the User’s Guide of RISO Network Card.
Connection with a Computer 13
REG-ML_EN.book Page 14 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Software Installation
Before printing from a computer connected to the machine via a USB cable, the RISO printer driver must be installed.
Before printing from a computer connected to the machine via a network, both the RISO printer driver and RISO Network Card must be installed. Refer to the Printer Driver User’s Guide and RISO Network Card User’s Guide for
instructions on installation.
Note:
• RISO Network Card is an option.
The software supplied with this machine is as follows:
‹ RISO Printer Driver
RISO Printer Drivers are for use with RISO Printers only.
Before setup, be sure to read the User’s Guide carefully.
The User’s Guide can be found as a PDF file* in the CD-ROM which came with the RISO Printer.
*To be able to view PDF format files, it is necessary for either Adobe® Reader® or Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®
to be installed.
Adobe® Reader® or Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® software can be freely downloaded from the Adobe website
(http://www.adobe.com/).
‹ RISO Utility Software
The software package includes the “RISO USB PRINT MANAGER” and “RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER”.
• “RISO USB PRINT MANAGER”
Application that manages the original data stored in the USB Flash Drive on the computer.
• “RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER”
Application that manages the counter data (number of prints, masters, etc.) output to the USB Flash Drive on
the computer.
14 Connection with a Computer
REG-ML_EN.book Page 15 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Paper Recommendations
Size and Weight Restrictions
The table shows the specifications of the usable print paper.
Usable Printing Paper
Size
Weight
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") to
310 mm × 432* mm (123/16" × 17")
46 g/m2 (12-lb bond ) to
210 g/m2 (110-lb index)
*The machine can print (feed) paper up to 555 mm (2127/32") long by setting the “Custom Paper Entry”. )p.170,
)p.171
Important!:
• Even when using paper whose sizes and weight are supported by the machine, it may not pass through the
machine depending on such factors as the paper quality, ambient conditions, and storage conditions. For more
information, consult your dealer (or authorized service representative).
Do not use the following types of paper, as they can cause jams or misfeeds:
•
•
•
•
•
Extremely thin paper (less than 46 g/m2 (12-lb bond))
Extremely thick or heavy paper (greater than 210 g/m2 (110-lb index))
Wrinkled, curled, folded, or torn paper
Chemically treated or coated paper (such as thermal or carbon paper)
Paper having a sticky section or holes (such as an envelope and label paper)
Note:
• Paper with a horizontal grain direction can cause problems with paper supply. Use paper with a vertical grain direction.
• Images are not output onto the entire area of usable print paper. The maximum printing areas differ among models.
)p.18
• When using poorly cut paper or coarse surfaced paper (drawing paper, etc.), arrange the paper neatly before use.
• Depending on the type of paper used, paper dust may be generated when using the machine. Please clean and
ventilate the area adequately.
RISO does not assure that paper outside the above specifications pass through the machine and can be used for
printing.
Paper Recommendations 15
REG-ML_EN.book Page 16 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Tips for Better Paper Feeding
To prevent paper jams and misfeeds, follow the directions below:
• When using standard or light-weight paper, set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to “NORMAL” (
).
Then open all four Paper Arrangers. )p.33, )p.35
• When using thick paper (such as card stock), set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to “CARD” (
),
and open the two inner Paper Arrangers. )p.33, )p.35
• When using slippery paper, set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to “CARD” (
). )p.33
• Slide the Feed Tray Paper Guides, Receiving Tray Paper Guides, and Paper Stopper to fit the paper size. )p.32, )p.35
• Use flat printing paper that is free of folds. If curled paper is unavoidable, place the printing paper so that the inner
curled part faces down.
• Paper may stick to the drum (cylinder) surface if the top margin is too narrow on the original or if the upper portion
of the original uses a large amount of ink. To solve this problem, lower the print position to provide a wider top margin or reverse the top and bottom of the original. Then restart printing from the beginning.
Storing Environment
Store printing paper in a level, dry area. Storing the paper in an excessively humid area can result in paper jams or
poor print quality.
After unpacking printing paper, keep the remaining paper wrapped and store it in a moisture-proof box. It is highly recommended to put silica gel in the paper storage box.
16 Paper Recommendations
REG-ML_EN.book Page 17 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Originals
Size and Weight Restrictions
Usable originals are as follows.
Using the Glass Platen
Using the ADF unit (Option)
Size
Weight
Size
Weight
50 mm × 90 mm (131/32" × 39/16")
to
310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
Max.
10kg
(22 lb)
100 mm × 148 mm
(315/16" × 527/32")
to
310 mm × 432 mm
(123/16" × 17")
50 g/m2 (13-lb bond)
to
128 g/m2 (34-lb bond)
• Originals are scanned according to the size of paper placed on the Paper Feed Tray when masters are made; for
the same width, the positions of the Feed Tray Paper Guides.
When the placed paper is smaller than an original, not the entire original will be scanned.
When the placed paper is larger than an original, dirt on the glass or shade of the original, for example, may result
in unexpected dirt in the area beyond the size of the original.
• Bound originals can also be used on the Glass Platen.
• You can feed automatically up to 50 original sheets when using the ADF unit (Option).
(When originals of 80 g/m2 (21-lb bond) or less are used)
Note:
• Use the Glass Platen when printing the following originals:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Patched or worn originals
Wrinkled, curled, folded, or torn originals
Transparent originals (such as tracing paper or OHP transparencies)
Chemically treated originals (such as thermal or carbon paper)
Originals with correction fluid or glue
Extremely thin originals (less than 50 g/m2 (13-lb bond))
Extremely thick originals (greater than 128 g/m2 (34-lb bond))
Heavy drawing paper
Originals with staples or clips
• If an original wrinkled, curled, or creased flatten it thoroughly so that the original can be pressed directly onto the
Glass Platen during processing.
• If correction fluid or glue is used on an original, thoroughly dry it before placement.
• For an original patched with thick paper, the shade of the patched paper may also be printed.
Originals 17
REG-ML_EN.book Page 18 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Maximum Printing Areas and Margins
The maximum printing areas are as follows.
Model
Maximum Printing Area
EZ591
291 mm × 425 mm
(117/16" × 163/4")
EZ571
291 mm × 413 mm
(117/16" × 161/4")
EZ531
251 mm × 357 mm
(97/8" × 141/16")
Usable Maximum Print Paper Size
310 mm × 432 mm
(123/16" × 17")
Important!:
• No matter which size of originals is printed, the margins indicated on the figure are required for the originals.
Reduce the original if necessary to fit it inside of the margins. Place an original so that its end having a
5 mm (3/16") margin at least comes to the left of the Glass Platen or the ADF unit (Option).
Materials Not to Be Printed
Do not use the machine in any manner which violates the law or infringes on established copyrights, even when making copies for personal use. Consult your local authorities for further details. In general, use discretion and common
sense.
18 Originals
REG-ML_EN.book Page 19 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Before Starting to Use
Originals 19
REG-ML_EN.book Page 20 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Function and Name of Each Part
1) Master Disposal Box ()p.213)
Holds discarded masters.
2) Feed Tray Ascent/Descent Button ()p.34)
Lowers or raises the Paper Feed Tray when changing or
adding paper.
3) Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever
()p.33)
Adjusts the paper feed pressure according to paper in
use.
4) Feed Tray Paper Guides ()p.32)
Holds and guides paper.
Slide to fit to the sides of paper.
5) Paper Feed Tray ()p.32)
Load print paper on this tray.
6) Horizontal Print Position Adjustment Dial
()p.95)
Move the print position to the left or right.
7) Platen Cover
Opened and closed when placing the original.
20 Function and Name of Each Part
8) Platen Cover Pad ()p.221)
9) Glass Platen ()p.40, )p.221)
Place the original face-down.
10) Control Panel ()p.22, )p.23)
Press the keys to perform various print operations.
11) Display ()p.24 ∼ p.30)
Displays various screens needed for print operations. Touch
the buttons on the screen to execute various print operations.
12) Auto Document Feeder (Option)
The Feeder can hold approximately 50 sheets of the
original sheets (80 g/m2 (21-lb bond)). Place the original
face-down.
13) ADF Original Receiving Tray
Scanned originals are ejected into this tray.
14) ADF Original Release Lever
If an original is jammed, press to eject from the ADF unit.
15) ADF Original Guide
Slides and adjusts to the width of the original to hold
together.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 21 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
16) Ink Cartridge Cap Holder ()p.212)
Secure the Ink Cartridge cap.
17) Front Cover
18) Print Drum (Cylinder) ()p.215)
19) Ink Cartridge ()p.211)
20) Print Drum (Cylinder) Handle ()p.215)
21) Print Drum (Cylinder) Release Button ()p.215)
Unlocks the Print Drum (Cylinder) for removal.
22) Counter
Counts the number of copies (total print counter) and the
number of made masters (master counter).
23) Master Making Unit Handle ()p.208)
24) Master Making Unit Release Button ()p.208)
Unlocks the Master Making Unit for removal.
25) Master Making Unit ()p.208)
26) USB Slot ()p.43)
Connect the USB Flash Drive.
27) Paper Jumping Wing ()p.98)
Automatically adjusts to keep printed paper neatly
stacked.
28) AC inlet
Do not touch the POWER switch on the upper part of the
AC inlet (power cord connection). Changing the POWER
switch setting by mistake will cause damage.
29) Paper Arranger ()p.35)
Press to open for aligning printed paper.
30) Receiving Tray Paper Guides ()p.35)
Aligns printed paper neatly.
Slide according to the width of print paper size.
31) Paper Stopper ()p.35)
Slide to adjust to the length of print paper size.
32) Paper Receiving Tray ()p.35)
Printed copies are output to this tray.
33) Power Switch ()p.32)
34) Stabilizer
35) Master Making Unit Cover ()p.208)
Open and close to install Master Roll.
36) Master Guide Flap ()p.209)
37) Thermal Print Head ()p.221)
38) Master Roll Holder ()p.209)
39) Master Roll ()p.208)
Function and Name of Each Part 21
REG-ML_EN.book Page 22 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Control Panel
The Control Panel features permanent keys such as
and
. It also has a large-size display that shows various messages and function buttons.
This section introduces hardware Key names and functions, as well as the display window and its functions.
1
2
3
4
10
SPEED
SLOW
MAS
FAST
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
MODE
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
DENSITY
Paper
LIGHT
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idle
Info
PRINT POSITION
9
1) MODE Key ()p.24)
Use to change modes.
2) Display ()p.24 ∼ p.30)
3) Print Quantity Display
Displays the number of copies, or numeric values
entered for various settings.
4) P Key ()p.126)
Use to retrieve stored programs. The indicator on the key
lights when set.
5) × Key ()p.126)
Use to move between fields in setup screens, or set up
programed printing.
6) + Key ()p.126)
Use to move between fields in setup screens, or set up
programed printing.
7) C Key
Cancels entered numerical values, or reset the counter
to 0.
8) Print Quantity Keys (0 to 9 Keys)
Use to enter the number of copies, or the numerical values for various settings.
9)
Key ()p.126, )p.134)
Use to move between fields in setup screens, or retrieve
stored memory.
22 Control Panel
DARK
A4
8
7
6 5
12
11
10) Print Speed Adjustment Keys/Indicator
()p.92)
Selects the print speed from five levels.
The indicator above the keys shows the current speed
level.
11) Print Density Adjustment Keys/Indicator
()p.93)
Selects the print density from five levels.
The indicator above the keys shows the current density
level.
12) Vertical Print Position Adjustment Keys/
Indicator ()p.94)
Adjusts the print position in the vertical direction (within
±15 mm (±19/32")) after making a master.
The indicator above the keys shows the offset amount
from the center.
To clear the offset amount, press
.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 23 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
20 21
MASTER-MAKING
19 18 17
PRINT
WAKE-UP
AUTO-PROCESS
K
RESET
PROOF
START
STOP
13
14 15 16
13) Start Key
Starts master-making or printing process or executes
specified operations.
The key is lighted only when the key is active.
14) Proof Key ()p.96)
Use to check print result after adjusting the print position,
for example.
This allows you to print proof copies without affecting the
value on the Print Quantity Display.
15) Stop Key
Stops current operation in progress. During the mastermaking procedure, the machine will not stop until the
master-making process is completed.
16) Reset Key
Returns all settings to the initial settings.
17) WAKE-UP Key / Log out Key ()p.39, )p.45,
)p.49)
Wakes up the printer in Energy Saving mode.
Use this key also to log out from the machine.
21) Progress Arrows
Indicates master-making and printing progress status.
1) Master-Making
2)
3)
4)
Indicator
Master-Making
Stop Bar
Print Indicator
Printing Stop Bar
Ready to make a master (Auto ON): when 1 is blinking
Ready to make a master: when 1, 2 are blinking
Ready to print: when 3, 4 are blinking
The indicator increases one bar at a time from the left,
indicating the progress of the current master-making or
printing job.
• If a master-making or printing job is halted, the
progress bar stays lit at that position. (Ready for
resume)
18) Auto-Process Key ()p.64)
Performs non-stop operation from master-making
through printing. When activated, the indicator besides
the key lights.
19) Print Key
Makes the printer be ready for printing.
20) Master-Making Key
Makes the printer be ready for making masters.
Control Panel 23
REG-ML_EN.book Page 24 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Display
The Screens and their Various Stages
When the power is turned on, after a brief display of the start-up screen, the initial screen appears.
Power ON
Mode Screen
Initial Screen (Ex.)
Start-Up Screen (Ex.)
Select an Operation Mode
RISO EZ571A
Do Not Set Original Yet
MasterMake
Printing
Booting
When the optional Document Storage Card or
USB Flash Drive is attached
Note:
• Start-Up screen settings
Select [Start-Up Screen] on the
Admin. screen.
• Initial screen settings
You can select [Mode Screen], [RISO
Print], [Link Mode] or [Scanning] as
the initial screen to best suit your
needs.
Select [Display Priority] on the
Admin. screen.
Refer to the following pages for more
information about the different types of
Initial screen.
• About the
key
By pressing the
key, you can
switch the [Mode Screen] and [Basic
Screen]. )p.28
Select an Operation Mode
RISO EZ571A
MasterMake
Printing
When the optional Linked Printer is connected
Select an Operation Mode
RISO EZ571A
LBP
MasterMake
Link Print
Printing
24 Display
Scanning
REG-ML_EN.book Page 25 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Basic Screen
Other Screens
• Touch [MasterMake] to display the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page (A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
‹ Selections Screen
Quickly change settings for a function or open its
screen.
Admin.
Ready to Make Master
Paper
Auto
Basic
L in e
Selections
Functions
Admin.
A4
Renew
Page
Interval
Confidential
Contrast
Adj
Book
Shadow
Job Memory
D-Feed
Check
Multi-Up
Print
Black
Id le
READY
Info
• Touch [Printing] to display the Print Basic Screen.
Ready to Print
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Paper
Print Position
‹ Functions Screen
Access to a variety of functions.
0 mm
A4
0 mm
Ready to Make Master
D-Feed
Check
Renew Page
Black
READY
Basic
Idle
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Info
• Touch [Scanning] to display the Scan Basic
Screen.
Ready to scan data
Program
Tone Curve
Job Memory
Multi-Up Print
Dot Process
2 Up
Contrast Adj
Book Shadow
Page No.1
P . 1/4
File Name
scan_0001
Owner
Directory
1_folder
Owner-1
Basic
Functions
Page (B4)
Contrast
Admin.
Size
Format
‹ Admin. Screen
Changes the default values of various functions.
Auto
Line
B4
Ready to Make Master
Book
Shadow
Preview
Basic
Admin.
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Resets current settings
once opened
OK
• Touch [Link Print] to display the Link Basic
Screen.
Ready for Link Print
1
A4
Basic
Page(A4)
MP
2
A3
Admin.
Idle
LBP1
B4
Selections
Contrast
Functions
Size
Admin.
Feed Tray
Auto
Line
A4
Book
Shadow
All
DirectAccess Entry
Display
Selections Entry
Default
Display Priority
Mode Screen
System
Mode Key Pattern
Mode Select.
Link Mode
Start-Up Screen
Editor
Logo(EZ)
P . 1/10
Note:
• Depending upon the usage environment, some
of the “Admin.” features may not be available
(“Admin.” tab may not be displayed). Consult
your dealer (or authorized service
representative) for details.
Display 25
REG-ML_EN.book Page 26 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
About Modes
Touch the Mode button on the Mode Screen to view the basic screens of the various modes.
RISO EZ571A
Master Make
LBP
Scanning
Link Print
B
C
Printing
A
A) RISO Print
On the Operation screen displayed after selecting the Print Mode, you can select the operation of the machine
(the operation you are going to do).
RISO EZ571A
Master Make
Scanning
LBP
Link Print
Printing
1
2
1) Master Make
Scan the original set on the Glass Platen and making a master.
26 Display
2) Printing
Print with the master currently on the Print Drum
(Cylinder). Select [Printing] when the master-making operation is not required further after the completion of master-making.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 27 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
B) Scan Mode
This mode scans the original set on the Glass Platen and stores the scanned data in Storage Memory.
Ready to scan data
Page No.1
File Name
scan_0001
Owner
Directory
1_folder
Owner-1
Basic
Functions
Page (B4)
Contrast
Admin.
Size
Format
Auto
Line
B4
Book
Shadow
Preview
This setting is available when the optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash Drive is attached.
The data in Storage Memory can be edited using Editor functions.
See “Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode)”()p.178) for information on the Scan Mode.
C) Link Mode
This mode scans the original set on the Glass Platen and outputs the data using an optional Linked Printer connected to the machine. This process is called “Link Print”.
When optional Linked Printer is connected to the machine, we recommend that you select [Link Print]. The Link
Basic screen displays at start-up.
Ready for Link Print
Idle
LBP1
1
A4
Basic
Page (A4)
MP
2
A3
B4
Selections
Contrast
Functions
Size
Admin.
Feed Tray
Auto
Line
A4
Book
Shadow
When printing a small number of copies, it is more economical to use Link Print than making a master and printing with the machine.
See “When Using a Linked Printer” ()p.192) for information on the Link Mode.
Original
Printed Paper
Linked Printer
Display 27
REG-ML_EN.book Page 28 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Note:
•
Tip:
key
key can be set to function as “Mode Selection”
or “Loop”.
Select “Mode Key Pattern” on the Admin. screen.
Touch the Mode button on the Mode Screen to view
the basic screens of the various modes.
[Mode Selection]
Pressing the
key will open
the Mode Screen no matter
which screen you are currently
on.
[Loop]
The screen changes as shown
below when the
key is
pressed.
• Normally: “Master Making
Basic Screen” ←→ ”Print
Basic Screen”
• When a Linked Printer is
connected: “Link Basic
Screen” ←→ “Master Making/
Print Basic Screen”
• When the optional Document
Storage Card is installed:
“Scan Basic Screen” ←→
“Master Making/Print Basic
Screen”
28 Display
About the Recognition Screen
This machine is equipped with a User Management
function. ()p.106, )p.157 “Admin.”). If “User Management” is set, the Recognition Screen is displayed. If the
one of these screens shown below is displayed, input
the PIN code or connect the registered USB Flash
Drive. Consult your administrator for the PIN code and
the registered USB Flash Drive.
PIN code Input Screen
Registered USB Flash Drive Screen
REG-ML_EN.book Page 29 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Basic Screen Layout
The name and function of each area of the basic screens are explained below. The display of the basic screen differs
depending on whether you are printing from a paper document or printing from a computer.
Printing from a Paper Document
Ready to Make Master
Eco Mode
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
A4
Reservation
Black
1) Message Area
Displays the printer status and operational instructions. If
functions such as Program, ECO mode or Ink Saving are
used to print, the program information and/or function
icons are displayed.
2) Tab Area
Touch a tab to display its screen.
3) Functions Area
The main functions for master-making/printing steps.
Each button shows the current setting.
Touch the button to make changes.
Multi-Up
Print
Idle
Editor
In fo
5) Status Area
Displays the current status of the machine.
: Color (Colour) of the currently installed Print Drum
(Cylinder).
: Current status of the Linked Printer.
(A Linked Printer will not be displayed unless entered on
the Admin. screen.)
• [ERROR]: Error in network, etc..
• [---]: Linked Printer information cannot be retrieved.
• [READY]: Linked Printer is ready.
4) Direct Access Area
Up to four buttons can be registered in advance. Use this
area to register the most frequently-used functions.
You can register them on the Admin. screen.
)p.168
Pause
: Status of data sent from a computer.
Touch to display the list of data being received.
)p.46
• [Idle]: Ready to receive data
• [Data-Map]: Processing data for printing.
• [Pause]: Ready for output.
• [Error]: Error in data transmission.
• [Blocked]: Cannot receive data
Info
: Touch to display
information (consumables information, Print Drum (Cylinder) information,
date/time).
)p.207
Display 29
REG-ML_EN.book Page 30 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Printing from a Computer Data
3
Ready to Make Master
1
2
Basic
Selections
Document_1.doc
Owner : RISO
ReceiptTime : 30/09/11 05:30
Format : A4
Functions
Admin.
Paper
P.1/10
Preview
4
Skip Page
A4
Clear All
5
Process:
7
Pause before "Master"
Black
1) Tab Area
Job
Separation
Pause
6
In fo
4) Paper Button
(“Selections” and “Admin.” tabs are disabled)
Touch a tab to display its screen.
2) Job* Properties Area
)p.63
5) Auto Print
A printing operation can be set to stop at certain points.
(overrides driver settings)
)p.54
Properties of the current print job is displayed.
*Refers to the computer data ready for print output.
3) Job Operation Area
• [Renew Page]: Create another master when current
one is damaged or compromised, without having to
download data from the computer.
• [Preview]: Displays the master making image of the
page currently awaiting creation. (Available only in the
Master Making Basic Screen.)
6) Optional Device Area
Displays when an optional device is attached.
Touch to activate.
7) Status Area
Displays the current status of the machine.
This area shows the same information as that on the
“Printing from a paper Document” screen.
• [Skip Page]: Stops processing the current page and
moves on to process the next page.
• [Clear All]: Stops the current process altogether.
Buttons on Touch Screen
Select buttons by lightly touching with a finger.
Touch again to cancel the selection. Avoid pressing with excessive force.
Line
Not Selected.
Selected.
Revise
Buttons in gray cannot be selected.
Frequently Used Buttons
OK
Activates/Executes a setting.
Cancels a setting.
Closes a current window.
Press a button with a + on the right
side to expand options or display
Setup screens.
30 Display
Switch pages.
Increases/decreases selected values
(numbers, location, etc.).
Scrolls through screens.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 31 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Getting Acquainted
Basic Process
Printing from a Paper Document
Master-making process
Printing process
A placed original is scanned by the scanner, and a generated master is rolled around the Print Drum (Cylinder).
After a while, proof copy is performed. After checking the print result, enter the number of copies to be printed and
start printing.
Printing from a Computer Data
Master-making process
Printing process
Transfer the original data created with a computer to the machine via a network or USB Flash Drive.
A generated master is rolled around the Print Drum (Cylinder).
After a while, proof copy is performed. After checking the print result, enter the number of copies to be printed and
start printing.
Display 31
REG-ML_EN.book Page 32 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Preparing to Print
First, set up the Paper Feed Tray and Paper Receiving Tray of the machine.
Important!:
• Do not use unsuitable paper, or mix paper of different sizes.
Doing so can cause paper jams and damage the machine.
)p.15
Setting up the Paper Feed Tray and Loading Paper
1
3
Turn the power ON.
ON
Load paper.
1) Place paper in the printing orientation.
2) Slide the Feed Tray Paper Guides to fit to the
sides of the paper. Then turn the right and left
Feed Tray Paper Guide Levers to lock the
guides.
OFF
2
Open the Paper Feed Tray.
: Unlock
: Lock
Important!:
Pull the Paper Feed Tray to open until it comes to
a rest.
• Make sure that the Feed Tray Paper Guides fit
tight up against the paper.
Failure to do so can produce undesired results.
Note:
• Custom-sized paper must be registered on the
Admin. screen before use.
)p.170
Failure to do so may create an incomplete master.
32 Preparing to Print
REG-ML_EN.book Page 33 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
4
Select the paper feed pressure.
Position the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment
Lever according to the finish of the paper.
NORMAL (
CARD (
): For standard or thin paper
): For thick or smooth-surface paper
Note:
• The setting condition of the paper feed pressure
is displayed at the top of the [Paper] button on
the Basic Screen.
5
Check the Basic Screen.
1) Select a mode.
2) Touch [MasterMake] on the Operation
Selection Screen.
The Master Making Basic Screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Black
A4
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idle
In fo
Note:
• Paper size is automatically detected. If the size
display shows [Custom] even if a standardsized paper is loaded, the Feed Tray Paper
Guides are not properly set against the paper.
Make sure that the paper fits tightly against the
Feed Tray Paper Guides.
)p.32
Preparing to Print 33
REG-ML_EN.book Page 34 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Adding or Replacing Paper
When you add paper or replace with paper of a different size at the time of printing, press the Feed Tray Ascent/
Descent Button to lower the Paper Feed Tray.
• The Paper Feed Tray is lowered while you press and hold the button, and
when you release the button, the tray stops at that position.
• When the tray runs out of paper or you remove all paper, the tray is automatically lowered to the bottom.
Feed Tray Ascent/Descent
Button
Important!:
• When changing to a different paper size, remember to readjust the Receiving
Tray Paper Guides and Paper Stopper. ()p.35)
• When changing to a different quality paper, remember to adjust the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever.
Closing the Paper Feed Tray
Before closing the Paper Feed Tray, remove the paper and widen the Feed Tray Paper Guides to the limits. Then
close the Paper Feed Tray.
34 Preparing to Print
REG-ML_EN.book Page 35 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Setting up the Paper Receiving Tray
1
Open the Paper Receiving Tray.
Pull the Paper Receiving Tray down until it comes
to a rest.
2
Position the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides.
1) Raise the Receiving Tray Paper Guides.
2) Hold their lower part and slide them to fit the
4
Adjust the Paper Arrangers.
Alignment of paper is affected by sizes and
strength of paper. Adjust the Paper Arrangers so
that printed paper is aligned.
Press the Paper Arranger to push the plates out,
pull up to pull them in.
‹ For plain paper
paper width.
Press to open all of the four Paper Arrangers.
‹ For plain paper with images
lopsided on page
Important!:
• For thick paper such as drawing paper, position
the Receiving Tray Paper Guides a little wider
than the actual paper width.
3
Set the Paper Stopper.
1) Raise the Paper Stopper.
2) Slide to fit the length of the paper.
Press to open the two Paper Arrangers on the
more heavily printed side.
‹ For thick paper
Press to open the two Paper Arrangers (right
and left) closer to the machine.
Preparing to Print 35
REG-ML_EN.book Page 36 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Closing the Paper Receiving Tray
Remove all printed copies and follow the steps below to
close the Paper Receiving Tray.
1) Slide the Paper Stopper to the edge of the Paper
Receiving Tray.
2) Fold in.
3) Pull up the Paper Arrangers, slide the Receiving
Tray Paper Guides to the left and right as far as
they will go.
4) Fold in.
5) Close the Paper Receiving Tray.
36 Preparing to Print
REG-ML_EN.book Page 37 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Placing the original
When placing on the Glass Platen
Open the Platen Cover and place the original facedown. Align the center of the original with the mark on
the left-hand side of the glass. After placing the original,
slowly close the Platen Cover.
Magazines, books, scrap books, etc. should be placed
on the Glass Platen. )p.18
Note:
• If the Gauge Cover is installed, place the original
underneath.
Gauge Cover
Grasp here
and lift up the
gauge cover
Place the original
face-down
When placing in the ADF unit (Option)
Use the ADF unit if you are printing multiple originals in succession.
Place originals so that the one to be scanned first is on the top. Afterwards, align the ADF Original Guide with the
page width and set originals fully to the rear of the ADF.
Important!:
• The placeable original size of 100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") and above.
If the original is smaller than the paper size that can be set in the ADF unit, place the original on the Glass Platen.
• Do not place multiple originals of differing sizes or otherwise unsuitable originals into the ADF unit.
It might cause paper jams and damage the machine.
)p.17
• Once the originals are placed into the ADF unit, “Auto Process” setting is turned ON. Press the
key to turn
it OFF. Default “Auto Process” setting for the ADF unit can be changed on the Admin. screen.
)p.159
Note:
• Up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21-lb bond) paper can be placed in the ADF unit.
• To print a proof copy after each master-making process, select [ADF Semi-Auto].
)p.147
Placing the original 37
REG-ML_EN.book Page 38 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Set the original face-down.
Important!:
• The placeable original size of 100 mm × 148 mm
(315/16" × 527/32") and above.
Tip:
Setting Direction (direction of text on the original)
The original setting direction is decided by the number
of pages set when using “Multi-Up Print” function.
Set the original according to the direction of text on the
original seen from the touch panel side.
or
1
1
Align Top
Align Side
1
38 Placing the original
or
1
REG-ML_EN.book Page 39 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Printing from a Paper Document or Book
The steps for scanning an original for printing is explained below.
Note:
• See “When using a Linked Printer” ()p.192) to print from a Linked Printer with Auto-Link function.
(“Auto-Link” function is not available for EZ591U.)
1
Make sure the machine is ON.
Check the Control Panel.
3
Note:
‹ When the recognition screen is displayed.
Follow the message on the screen.
For details, see )p.43.
The initial screen will be displayed after the
user has been identified.
• When the power is OFF, both the Display and
the
key are off. Turn the power ON.
)p.32
• If the
key is lit, the machine is in Energy
Saving mode. Press the
key to cancel
Energy Saving mode.
2
Check the Display.
‹ When the initial screen is displayed
Proceed to step 4.
The initial screen differs depending on the setting of “Display Priority” of “Admin.”.
Check for printing paper.
4
Touch [MasterMake] on the Operation Selection Screen.
Select an Operation Mode
RISO EZ571A
Make sure paper is loaded.
To load or to change the paper, see the following
page:
)p.32
After replacing with paper of a different size,
adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides and Paper Stopper.
)p.35
MasterMake
Printing
The Master Making Basic screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Black
A4
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id le
Info
Printing from a Paper Document or Book 39
REG-ML_EN.book Page 40 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Note:
Note:
• When you see [Data-Map] in the Status Area,
the machine is busy receiving electronic data
from the computer. Please wait a moment.
• When the following screens are displayed, follow the message on the screen.
For details, see )p.43.
The following selections are available:
• Image Processing mode ()p.56)
• Scanning Contrast ()p.58)
• Size ()p.59)
• Paper ()p.63)
• Auto Process ()p.64)
• Dot Process ()p.65)
• Contrast Adj ()p.66)
• Tone Curve ()p.67)
• Ink Saving ()p.68)
• 2 Up/Multi-Up Print ()p.69)
• Book Shadow ()p.81)
• Top Margin ()p.83)
• Side Margin ()p.85)
• Preview ()p.87)
• Confidential ()p.141)
• Interval ()p.97)
• Jump Wing Control ()p.98)
• Special Paper Ctrl ()p.98)
• Reservation ()p.142)
• Max. Scan ()p.90)
• Program ()p.123)
• Job Memory ()p.134)
• Idling Action ()p.143)
• Renew Page ()p.144)
• ADF Semi-Auto ()p.147)
This setting is available when the ADF unit
(Option) is installed.
• Job Separation
This setting is available when the Job Separator
(option) is installed.
• Storage Memory
This setting is available when the Document
Storage Card (Option) is attached.
• Overlay ()p.187)
This setting is available when the Document
Storage Card (Option) is attached.
• Auto-Link
This setting is available when connecting a
Linked Printer to the machine. This setting is
not available for EZ591U.
5
Place the original.
6
Configure print functions.
Place the original on the Glass Platen or in the
ADF unit (Option).
To place the original, see )p.37.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Black
A4
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Make sure the Master Making Basic Screen is displayed and make various settings if needed.
If the Master Making Basic Screen is not displayed, press the
key.
In the Master Making Basic Screen, select functions as needed.
7
40 Printing from a Paper Document or Book
Check the Paper Receiving Tray.
Adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides and Paper Stopper to match the paper
size used.
)p.35
REG-ML_EN.book Page 41 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
8
Press the
key.
Note:
• You can also adjust the print position (up and
down only), the density, and the speed while
print process is in progress.
Enter the number of copies using
10 the
Print Quantity Keys.
The entered number is displayed on the Print
Quantity Display.
Starts scanning of the original. A master is made
once the scan is completed, and a proof copy will
be printed.
Note:
• When “Auto Process” is selected, the process
will be different.
)p.64
9
Note:
• To change the number, press the
then re-enter the correct number.
11 Press the
key,
key.
Check the proof copy result.
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
Admin.
Paper
0 . 0mm
A4
Renew Page
Reservation
Black
Interval
Id l e
In fo
When a proof copy is printed, the Print Basic
Screen will be displayed automatically.
Check the proof copy; e.g., print position and density.
If necessary, change print position and density.
•
•
•
•
Print Position ()p.94)
Print Density ()p.93)
Interval Printing ()p.97)
Jump Wing Control ()p.98)
After adjustment, press the
proof copy.
key to print a
The specified number of copies will be printed.
Note:
• Press the
key to interrupt printing operation
currently underway.
• When printing from a computer, if the machine
is inactive for a certain period of time, it determines that the current job is completed, even if
the actual printing is still under way. If another
person accidentally initiates another job from
the computer, this will cause a new master to be
made, discarding the current one. To prevent
this from occurring, you may set a “Reserve
Period”. We recommend that you activate the
“Reservation” setting when printing leaflets, etc.
to prevent interruption.
)p.142
• Easily restore current settings by saving them
into memory. Saved settings can be retrieved
even when the
key is pressed, or after turning the power off.
)p.134
Important!:
• When the machine has not been used for a long
period of time, the print quality may suffer due
to dry ink on the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Press the
key to print proof copies several times.
Printing from a Paper Document or Book 41
REG-ML_EN.book Page 42 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Press the
12 complete.
key when print job is
The setting returns to its default value.
Note:
• After printing is completed, the master remains
on the Print Drum (Cylinder). To protect confidential documents from unauthorized duplication, use the Confidential feature to discard the
master after printing.
)p.141
• Even if you do not press the
key, with the
passage of a certain amount of time (factory
default setting: 5 minutes), the setting will be
automatically reset.
)p.134
13
Remove the printed paper.
Tip:
When Linked Printer is connected to the machine
(Not available for EZ591U)
“Auto-Link” changes the Output Tray according to the
print quantity.
The factory default setting is output from the machine when
the print quantity is 20 or more and output from a Linked
Printer when the print quantity is 19 or less.
When the following functions are set, however, the
machine will print copies regardless of the number of
copies.
• 2 Up
• Layout
• Program
• Ink Saving
Important!:
• Make sure to enter the print quantity before pressing
the
key.
The original is printed by switching the Output Tray to
match on the quantity.
If you press the
key when the print quantity is 0,
master-making from the machine will start.
Note:
• You can change “Link-Free Volume” from “Admin.”
so as to switch the Output Tray.
)p.164
Tip:
Open the Receiving Tray Paper Guides and
remove the paper.
42 Printing from a Paper Document or Book
Auto Idling
When “Auto Idling” is set to ON, idling operations may
occur when master-making process is initiated.
Factory default is set to idle automatically at the beginning of the master-making when the machine is inactive
for over 12 hours.
To toggle “Auto Idling” ON/OFF, or to modify number of
hours before activating next idling, go to the Admin.
screen.
)p.163
Idling can also be manually initiated when making a
master.
)p.143
REG-ML_EN.book Page 43 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
‹ When registered USB Flash Drive
Tip:
Operations on the Recognition Screen
When “User Management” is set by the administrator,
the users will be asked to identify themselves (“User
identification access”: if he/she is registered or not) during operations.
The user identification procedures will differ according
to the Recognition and Identification System decided by
the administrator. )p.106
Screen is displayed
Connect the registered USB Flash Drive to the USB
slot.
Insert the registered
USB flash drive
Note:
• A PIN code and USB Flash Drive are used in the
Recognition and Identification System. Contact your
administrator for the PIN code and the USB Flash
Drive you have to use.
‹ When the PIN code Input Screen is
displayed
Enter the PIN code using the Print Quantity Keys
and touch [OK].
Input the PIN code
The initial screen will be displayed after the user has
been identified.
OK
Note:
The initial screen will be displayed after the user has
been identified.
If an unregistered or unusable USB Flash Drive is
connected into the machine, an error message will
be displayed. Connect the registered USB Flash
Drive.
Note:
Important!:
• If an incorrect PIN code is entered, an error message will be displayed. Re-enter the correct PIN
code.
After printing is completed, press the
key to log
out before leaving the machine. If you do not log out,
the logged-in state will remain until “Auto Clear” is
activated. During this time, anyone can use the
machine (as you) without logging in.
For “Auto Clear”, see )p.161.
Printing from a Paper Document or Book 43
REG-ML_EN.book Page 44 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Printing from a Computer Data
[Direct Print] [USB Job List]
This machine can directly print the original created on the computer by connecting the computer and machine by cable.
The data will be digitally processed into a master, thus achieving higher quality prints than the master-making of
scanned originals.
Furthermore, a USB slot for connecting a USB Flash Drive is supplied with this machine so that you can print by connecting a USB Flash Drive that stores the data of originals to the machine even if the computer and machine are not
connected by cable.
USB Flash Drive
Connect the USB Flash Drive
to the USB slot
Note:
• First, install a proper printer driver on your computer. See the RISO Printer Driver User’s Guide for installation details.
• Document data created on your PC can be stored in the optional Document Storage Card attached to the machine.
• This manual provides only a summary of functions available when printing from a computer.
See RISO Printer Driver User’s Guide for further details on sending data and other settings.
44 Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 45 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Auto Process and Stop Timing
Auto Process is a combined automated steps of receiving data from the computer, making a master, and printing.
To activate “Process”, open the printer properties dialog box on the computer and select “Auto-process”. (A proof
copy will not be printed.)
During each process, in order to adjust settings or to change paper, you can stop the operation.
To temporarily halt an operation during the creation of a master or during print process, select one of the following
three options for “Process” in the printer properties dialog box.
• Pause before “Master”
Halts the operation before master-making:
To change settings, to change paper and to change Print Drum (Cylinder)
• Pause before “Print”
Halts the operation before printing:
To print proof, to adjust ink density, to adjust positioning and to change printing speed
• Auto-process “OFF”
Stops twice; before making a master, and again before printing.
Receive data
from computer
Stop before
making a master
Auto-process “ON”
Master Making
Stop before
printing
---
---
Yes
---
Pause before “Print”
---
Yes
Auto-process “OFF”
Yes
Yes
Pause before
“Master”
Printing
Note:
• The timing for stopping printing can also be changed from the display of the machine.
)p.54
Printing Computer Data [Direct Print]
The computer and printer must be connected by cable.
Note:
• When “User Management” is set by the administrator, the users will be asked to identify themselves during operations.
)p.43
1
2
Make sure the machine is ON.
Check the Control Panel.
Note:
• When the power is OFF, both the Display and
the
key are off. Turn the power ON.
)p.32
• The machine automatically wakes up from
Energy Saving mode when data is sent from a
computer, and it starts processing the data.
Check for printing paper.
Make sure paper is loaded.
To load or to change the paper, see the following page:
)p.32
After replacing with paper of a different size,
adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides and Paper Stopper.
)p.35
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] 45
REG-ML_EN.book Page 46 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
3
Set printing options from your computer screen.
2) Touch [Output].
If you want to operate the ID print, touch
[ID Print Job].
Use the printer driver.
Important!:
• Make sure to remove the checkmark from the
“Collate” option in the Print dialog box.
Note:
• If you are using RISO Network Card, you can
check the machine status (power ON/OFF,
paper settings, etc.) remotely from your computer monitor.
4
5
Click [OK] in the print dialog box.
Data is sent from the computer.
When the machine receives data, a print job automatically starts in accordance with the printer
driver settings.
Skip to step 6 if you are printing in Full Auto.
Perform printing from the control
panel.
The displayed screen and operation procedure
differ depending on the “Auto-Process”
(Advanced tab) setting of the printer driver.
‹ Printing with Pause before “Master”
The Master Making Basic Screen in step 2) is
halted depending on the use of the machine or
Admin. settings. In this case, press the
key.
1) Touch
Pause
.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Black
A4
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Pause
In fo
The Job List screen is displayed.
46 Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List]
Job List
Close
Pause
Owner
Document_1.doc
RISO
Cps. Page
100
Clear
10
Output
Waiting Job(s)
01 Document_2.doc
RISO
200
1
02 Document_3.doc
RISO
50
2
Clear
File name only
ID Print Job
The following screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Document_1.doc
Owner: RISO
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 05:30
Format: A4
Functions
P.1/10
Preview
Skip Page
Admin.
Paper
A4
Clear All
Process:
Auto-process "OFF"
Pause
Black
3) Press the
Job
Separation
Info
key.
After making a master, start printing.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 47 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
‹ Printing with Pause before “Print”
A master is made after receiving the data. The
machine stops after printing a proof copy.
1) Check the proof copy and adjust the set2)
tings as needed.
Press the
key.
Printing starts.
‹ Printing with Auto-process “OFF”
1) Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Pause before “Mas-
2)
3)
ter””.
Stop after making a master and printing a
proof copy.
Check the proof copy and adjust the settings as needed.
Press the
key.
Printing starts.
Note:
• After printing is completed, the master remains
on the Print Drum (Cylinder). To protect confidential documents from unauthorized duplication, use the Confidential feature to discard the
master after printing.
)p.141
Tip:
When Linked Pritner is connected to the
machine (Not available for EZ591U)
“Auto-Link” changes the Output Tray according to
the print quantity.
)p.157
)p.192
Note:
• If the data contains multiple pages, repeat the
same steps for each page.
• Entering the number of copies from the Print
Quantity Keys will override the number specified in the Print dialog box.
• For “ID Print”, printing starts with specified Auto
Process mode after recognition.
• To manually stop a job during master-making or
printing operation, press the
key. In mastermaking process, the machine will stop after the
master is made. In the printing process, the
machine will stop printing.
Press the
key to resume the job.
6
Remove the printed paper.
Open the Receiving Tray Paper Guides and
remove the paper.
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] 47
REG-ML_EN.book Page 48 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Tip:
Job List Screen
Job List
Close
Pause
Owner
Document_1.doc
RISO
Clear
Cps. Page
100
10
Output
Waiting Job(s)
Document_2.doc
RISO
200
1
Document_3.doc
RISO
50
2
Clear
File name only
ID Print Job
Pause
Once the data is received, touch
on the
Basic Screen to review current Job List. From the
Job List screen, you can initiate output for jobs
pausing for output, or cancel jobs that are
“Paused/Data-Mapping/Waiting”.
Tip:
ID Print
The data sent from the printer driver as the “ID
Print” is retrieved from the ID Print Job Screen and
printed.
Touch [ID Print Job] to display the Recognition
Screen, and follow the message on the screen.
The timing of the Recognition Screen differs
depending on the “User Management” setting set
by the administrator. )p.162
Document_4.doc
RISO
25
3
Document_5.doc
RISO
300
1
Note:
• To set the “ID Print” in the printer driver, a user
registration number (ID) is required (one or two
digits).
Contact your administrator for the PIN code or
registered USB Flash Drive, and the user registration number (ID).
48 Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 49 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Printing USB Data [USB Job List]
Even if the computer and machine are not connected by cable, you can print original data via a USB Flash Drive.
It is useful when the computer and printer are placed in different places.
Note:
• When “User Management” is set by the administrator, the users will be asked to identify themselves during operations. For details, see )p.43.
1
Connect the USB Flash Drive to the
computer.
5
Check for printing paper.
Note:
• If the Recognition and Identification System
("Recognized by") is set to "USB Flash Drive" in
the "User Management", it is also convenient
for you to use the registered USB Flash Drive
for outputting data.
2
Set printing options from your computer screen.
Make sure paper is loaded.
To load or to change paper, see following page.
)p.32
After replacing with paper of a different size,
adjust the position of the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides and Paper Stopper.
)p.35
Use the USB flash-via-printer driver.
Note:
• Make sure to remove the checkmark from the
“Collate” option in the Print dialog box.
3
Click [OK] in the print dialog box.
4
Make sure the machine is ON.
The data created on the computer is stored in the
USB Flash Drive.
6
Connect the USB Flash Drive that
contains the original data to print to
the USB slot.
Check the Control Panel.
Note:
• When the power is OFF, both the Display and
the
key are off. Turn the power ON.
)p.32
• If the
key is lit, the machine is in the Energy
Saving mode. Press the
key to cancel the
Energy Saving mode.
If you use an unregistered USB Flash Drive for
outputting data, skip to step 9.
Important!:
• Do not remove the USB Flash Drive until the
printing is completed.
It might cause loss of data and settings or damage to the USB Flash Drive.
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] 49
REG-ML_EN.book Page 50 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Note:
(The “ID Print Job” button is displayed on the
screen.)
• If the “USB print (Auto process)” has been set
as the output method (Basic tab), connecting
the USB Flash Drive starts master-making/
printing process as per the “Auto Process” setting. For detailed settings, refer to the “RISO
Printer Driver User's Guide”.
7
USB Job List
1_usb_folder
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Black
8
9
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Ready to make Master
Selections
30/09/11
FaxReport.doc
30/09/11
SummaryTable.xls
30/09/11
Report.doc
30/09/11
ID Print Job
Storage Memory
Functions
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
Touch the data to print.
The “USB Job List” retrieve screen is displayed.
If you are selecting data stored in a different
folder, touch that folder’s tab.
Note:
• To retrieve the ID print, touch [ID Print Job].
• When “Management Level” is set to “Low/
Admin tab only” in the “User Management”, [ID
Print Job] will not be displayed.
• If the stored data is not shown on the screen,
touch
or
to display it.
Touch [USB Job List].
Basic
98
Admin.
Paper
A4
Reservation
Free Area:
NewsLetter.doc
View edit
Photo
Dot
Process
Close
Confirm the retrieved data.
10 Use
the thumbnail to check whether the specified
P . 2/4
The USB Job List Screen (with “Non-ID Print”) is
displayed.
data is the desired data or not.
USB Job List
NewsLetter
Format: A4
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner:Admin
Date&Time:30/09/11 19:04
Rotate
Copy/Move
Output
All Pages
Ascend
Clear
Color:Black
From the “USB Job List” retrieve screen, you can
confirm retrieved data and specify output settings.
See )p.186 for operational details.
50 Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 51 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Touch [Retrieve].
11 The
data is retrieved and the Storage Mode Basic
Screen appears.
USB Job List
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner:Admin
Date&Time:30/09/11 19:04
NewsLetter
Format: A4
Rotate
Copy/Move
Output
All Pages
Ascend
Clear
Color:Black
The following screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
NewsLetter
Owner: Admin
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 05:30
Format: A4
Functions
P.1/2
Preview
Skip Page
Admin.
Paper
A4
Clear All
Process:
Black
Auto-process "OFF"
Pause
Job
Separation
Info
Note:
• You can change the output directions and stop
timing settings on Master Making Basic Screen.
For details, see )p.52 and )p.54
Enter the number of copies using
12 the
Print Quantity Keys.
The entered number is displayed on the Print
Quantity Display.
Press the
13 Data
is printed.
key.
After this, follow the same operations for paper
documents.
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] 51
REG-ML_EN.book Page 52 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Changing Output Directions
Output can be controlled from the Master Making/Print Basic Screens.
‹ Master Making Basic Screen
• [Preview]
You can check the master making image of the page currently
awaiting creation.
Note:
• In “Preview”, all received original data is displayed as a
master making image. The outside of print area is not actually printed.
• [Skip Page]
Cancels a pending page, and start processing the next page.
Use this button when current file has extra, unwanted pages.
• [Clear All]
Deletes all currently queued jobs. Use this button to delete a
job sent by a mistake, or pending jobs no longer needed.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Document_1.doc
Owner: RISO
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 05:30
Format: A4
Functions
P.1/10
Preview
Skip Page
Admin.
Paper
A4
Clear All
Process:
Black
Auto-process "OFF"
Pause
Job
Separation
Info
‹ Print Basic Screen
• [Renew Page]:
You can recreate another master when the current one is damaged without having to receive original data from
the computer.
Note:
• If multiple pages exist, only the last page will be processed.
• “Rotate” can also be specified.
• The confirmation screen for each respective button appears when touched. Touch [OK] to implement the
instructions.
Important!:
• [Skip Page] and [Clear All] are disabled during master-making or printing processes.
Press the
key to modify directions while master-making or printing is in progress.
(In master-making process, the operation will stop after the master is made. In print process, the print job is halted.)
Note:
• Pressing either the
key or the
key while waiting for a command (under Ready to Make Master/Ready to
Print screens) will delete the pending job.
52 Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 53 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
When selecting [Skip Page]
When selecting [Clear All]
1
1
Touch [Skip Page].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Document_1.doc
Owner: RISO
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 05:30
Format: A4
Ready to Make Master
Functions
P.1/10
Preview
Touch [Clear All].
Admin.
Basic
Paper
Skip Page
Selections
Document_1.doc
Owner: RISO
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 05:30
Format: A4
A4
Clear All
Process:
Auto-process "OFF"
2
Job
Separation
Process:
Skip Page
Auto-process "OFF"
Pause
Black
Info
2
Touch [OK].
Paper
A4
Job
Separation
Info
Touch [OK].
Current Job will be Cleared
OK?
Master-Making for Next Page
will be Started
OK?
Cancel
P.1/10
Preview
Admin.
Clear All
Pause
Black
Functions
Cancel
OK
Stops processing the current page and moves on
to process the next page.
OK
Clears current job.
Starts processing next data in queue.
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] 53
REG-ML_EN.book Page 54 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Changing Stop Timing
Stop timing as set on the printer driver takes priority by default.
However, the settings can be changed on the machine while the machine is halted.
Note:
• If “Process” is set to “Auto-process” in the Printing Property of the Printer Driver, press the
ation and to make changes.
1
Touch the “Process” function button.
3
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Document_1.doc
Owner: RISO
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 05:30
Format: A4
Functions
P.1/10
Preview
Admin.
Paper
Skip Page
A4
Clear All
Process:
Black
Pause before "Master"
Job
Separation
Pause
Info
The Auto Print screen appears.
2
Select the desired function.
Process
Cancel
OK
Auto-process "ON"
Pause before "Master"
Pause before "Print"
Auto-process "OFF"
• [Auto-process “ON”]: Makes a master then
automatically prints.
• [Pause before “Master”]: The operation stops
before making a master.
• [Pause before “Print”]: After a master is made
and a proof copy is printed, the operation stops.
• [Auto-process “OFF”]: Stops before making a
master, and then again before printing.
Note:
• See )p.46 for details regarding operations
after each stop.
54 Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List]
key to stop the oper-
Touch [OK].
Returns to Basic Screen. Auto Print setting is
updated.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 55 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Basic Operations
Printing from a Computer Data [Direct Print] [USB Job List] 55
REG-ML_EN.book Page 56 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Selecting Image Processing Mode [Image]
In order to make a master best suited for the original document, select an appropriate mode depending on whether
original contain only text (Line), photo, or both of them.
Note:
• Default Image Processing mode can be set on the Admin. screen.
)p.159
1
Touch [Image] on the Master Making
Basic Screen.
Image
(Detailed
settings)
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Touch [Photo], [Duo] or [Pencil] to select more
detailed settings.
Admin.
Paper
[Photo]
Standard
Select for photos other than [Portrait]
or [Group].
Portrait
Use this setting for pictures of one or
two individuals from the bust up. This
type of image processing is particularly
good for printing photos of faces.
Group
This setting is for group photos that are
over-exposed. This process is effective
for restoring facial features that have
become washed out by a flash.
The Group setting is not for photos with
faces that are overly dark. It may be
more effective to select [Standard] for
such photos.
Auto
Line
A4
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idl e
In fo
Select the appropriate Image
Processing mode for the original.
Ready to Make Master
Image
Cancel
OK
Basic
Admin.
Page(A4) L i n e
Photo
Line
Dot
Process
Black
Duo
Pencil
Reservation
Priority
Line
Photo
Multi-Up
Shadow off
Print
Idle
Editor
[Duo]
Line
Select to print small text clearly.
Photo
Select to print photos more clearly
(brightly).
Shadow off
Select to clear the background color
(colour) of the dark-color (colour)
originals (such as newspapers).
[Shadow off] is selectable aside from
[Line] and [Photo].
In fo
• [Line]: Only text contained; e.g., text document, newspaper
• [Photo]: Only photos contained
• [Duo]: Both text and photos contained
• [Pencil]: Pencil drawings or lightly printed documents
56 Selecting Image Processing Mode [Image]
Description
[Pencil]
Darker
Select to print faint originals clearly.
Lighter
Select to print cut-and-pasted pencil
drawings with shadows.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 57 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
3
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen.
Image Processing mode is updated.
Note:
• Some functions are not available in certain
Image Processing mode settings.
Line
Dot Process
Photo
Duo
—
Contrast (Auto)
Pencil
—
—
—
—
—
—
Contrast (1-5)
Contrast Adj
—
Tone Curve
—
: available
— : not available
• In the [Line] mode, when [Contrast] is set to
[Auto], the background color (colour) of the
original is automatically deleted.
)p.58
Selecting Image Processing Mode [Image] 57
REG-ML_EN.book Page 58 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Selecting Scanning Contrast for the Original
[Contrast]
Scanning contrast can be adjusted to accommodate the density of the original.
Specify by selecting Auto or numeric levels (1-5).
In the Auto mode, “Contrast” is automatically adjusted to the background color (colour) of the original for printing.
Important!:
• “Auto” is available only when Image Processing mode has been set to “Line”.
)p.56
• When the Ink Saving mode is selected, you cannot adjust the “Print Density”.
Note:
• Default Scanning Contrast can be set on the Admin. screen.
)p.159
1
Touch [Contrast] on the Master Making Basic Screen.
3
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
A4
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idl e
In fo
Touch the desired contrast or [Auto].
Ready to Make Master
Contrast
Cancel
Basic
OK
Admin.
Page(A4) A u t o
A4
Line
Dot
Process
ReservaD-Feed
Check
tion
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idle
Info
Levels of scanning contrast
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
: Very Light
: Light
: Standard
: Dark
: Very Dark
58 Selecting Scanning Contrast for the Original [Contrast]
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen.
“Contrast” is updated.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 59 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Enlarging/Reducing Originals
[Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Free] [Zoom]
The document can be printed enlarged or reduced. The following methods can be used to enlarge/reduce the original.
‹ Standard Ratio
Enlarging or reducing a standard-sized original (A4, B5, Letter, Legal, etc.) to print in another standard size.
‹ Auto*
The original can be automatically enlarged or reduced and printed according to the paper size in the Paper Feed Tray.
*“Auto” is available only when the originals are placed in the ADF unit (Option).
‹ Margin+
Reducing the original slightly. This feature is useful when allowing binding margins, or when text or diagram
extends beyond the printing area.
)p.18
Specify reduction rate of 90%-99% on the Admin. screen.
)p.161
Note:
• “Margin+” and “Standard Ratio” can be selected at the same time.
‹ Free
The top/bottom and left/right of the original can be enlarged or reduced and printed as desired.
Specify the enlarging/reducing between 50% and 200% in increments of 1%.
‹ Zoom
Allows you to specify numerical resize ratio.
Specify the enlarging/reducing between 50% and 200% in increments of 1%.
Note:
• To avoid paper jam, flipping or ink smudges on the back side by design the machine does not print too close to the
edge. The top edge in particular needs 5 mm (3/16") of margin space.
)p.18
5 mm (3/16") wide area on the top edge (marked ) of the Glass Platen or the ADF unit (Option) cannot be
scanned, regardless of enlargement or reduction settings.
Placement of original document
Glass Platen
(Top Side)
Original
(Bottom Side)
Top: This area (5mm (3/16") from the top edge)
cannot be scanned.
• Do not position the original within 5 mm (3/16") of the top edge, or the top edge of its printed image will be cut off.
This 5 mm (3/16") margin will remain even in the “Max. Scan” setting.
)p.90
• If the original document has no margin on its top edge, the top 5 mm (3/16") of its print will be cut off even when “Margin+” is selected. Move the original about 5 mm (3/16") inwards from the top edge of the Glass Platen and reduce
the size.
Enlarging/Reducing Originals [Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Free] [Zoom] 59
REG-ML_EN.book Page 60 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Enlargement and Reduction by Standard Ratio
[Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Auto]
1
Touch [Size] on the Master Making
Basic Screen.
Note:
• “Standard Ratio” and “Margin+” can be selected
at the same time. The “Current” field will indicate the combined result of “Standard Ratio” ×
“Margin-Plus Rate” when both are selected.
• When the page size (original size) is not
detected, “---” is displayed.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Size
B4
Page: A4
Paper: B4
Cancel
Recommend: 122%
Current: 114%
OK
Margin+
(
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idl e
In fo
Size
Page: A4
Paper: B4
Cancel
Recommend: 122%
Current: 122%
OK
Margin+
(
94%)
61% A3
B5
A4
122% A5
B4
B5
71% B4
A3
B5
A4
141% A4
B5
A3
B4
82% B4
A4
163% B5
A3
Free
A3
87% A4
B4
B5
Zoom
116% B4
B5
A3
A4
Auto
61% A3
B5
71% B4
A3
B5
A4
141% A4
B5
A3
B4
82% B4
A4
163% B5
A3
Free
A3
87% A4
B4
B5
Zoom
116% B4
B5
A3
A4
Auto
Touch the button corresponding to
the desired size.
3
94%)
A4
122% A5
B4
B5
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen.
“Size” is updated.
Touch [100%] to restore the original size.
For original with no margins, touch [Margin+]
before printing.
Important!:
• The “Margin+” setting is not available when
“Auto”, “Free” or “Zoom” is selected.
60 Enlarging/Reducing Originals [Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Free] [Zoom]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 61 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Enlargement/Reduction of a Changed Aspect Ration [Free]
1
Touch [Size] on the Master Making
Basic Screen.
Note:
• Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter
numbers.
• Press the
key to restore the original size
(100%).
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
4
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
B4
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idl e
In fo
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen.
“Size” is updated.
Touch [Free].
Size
Page: A4
Paper: B4
Cancel
OK
Recommend: 122%
Current: 100%
Margin+
(
94%)
61% A3
B5
A4
122% A5
71% B4
A3
B5
A4
141% A4
B5
A3
B4
82% B4
A4
163% B5
A3
Free
A3
87% A4
B4
B5
Zoom
116% B4
B5
A3
A4
Auto
3
Touch [OK].
B4
B5
Touch
or
to adjust enlarging/
reducing in horizontal or vertical
directions.
Size
Page: Lttr
Free
Paper: Ldgr
Feed
Cancel
Cancel
Recommend:
100%
Current: 129%
OK
OK
Margin+
(
94%)
B4
B5
Ve r t i c a l
A3
B4
Auto
Horizon
A3
Free
Zoom
(Numeric keypad is
available for input)
116% B5
A4
The reproduction size can be increased/
decreased in increments of 1%.
Enlarging/Reducing Originals [Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Free] [Zoom] 61
REG-ML_EN.book Page 62 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Enlarging and Reducing with the Zoom Function [Zoom]
1
Touch [Size] on the Master Making
Basic Screen.
Note:
• Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter
numbers.
• Press the
key to restore the original size
(100%).
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
4
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
B4
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idl e
In fo
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen.
“Size” is updated.
Touch [Zoom].
Size
Page: A4
Paper: B4
Cancel
Recommend: 122%
Current: 100%
OK
Margin+
(
94%)
61% A3
B5
A4
122% A5
71% B4
A3
B5
A4
141% A4
B5
A3
B4
82% B4
A4
163% B5
A3
Free
A3
87% A4
B4
B5
Zoom
116% B4
B5
A3
A4
Auto
3
Touch [OK].
Touch
Size
Page: Lttr
Zoom
Paper: Ldgr
or
B4
B5
to change ratio.
Cancel
Recommend:
100%
Cancel
Current: 129%
OK
OK Margin+
(
94%)
B5
Auto
B4
B5
A3
B4
A3
Free
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Zoom
116% B5 A4
The reproduction size can be increased/
decreased in increments of 1%.
62 Enlarging/Reducing Originals [Standard Ratio] [Margin+] [Free] [Zoom]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 63 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Using Custom-Sized Paper [Paper]
The machine automatically detects standard-sized paper in the Paper Feed Tray to create a correct size master for
printing. However, because non-standard paper sizes cannot be detected, they must be manually specified before a
master can be made.
Important!:
• Custom paper size must be registered on the Admin. screen. Failure to do so may make an incomplete master.
)p.170
1
Touch [Paper] on the Master Making
Basic Screen.
3
Touch [OK].
Paper Size
Ready to Make Master
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
OK
Standard-T
Auto
Basic
Cancel
W 90 H148 mm
Admin.
W340 H550 mm
Paper
W 90 H500 mm
Auto
Line
A4
W120 H240 mm
No Entry
Dot
Process
Black
2
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen.
“Paper size” is updated.
Touch the desired paper size.
Paper Size
Cancel
OK
Standard-T
Auto
W 90 H148 mm
W340 H550 mm
W 90 H500 mm
W120 H240 mm
No Entry
Important!:
• Previously recorded custom paper sizes is displayed on this screen. Make sure to register any
custom sizes not displayed here prior to use.
)p.170
Note:
• Touch [Auto] to use standard-sized paper.
Using Custom-Sized Paper [Paper] 63
REG-ML_EN.book Page 64 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Automatic Printing [Auto-Process]
Master-making and printing can be performed automatically in sequence.
When “Auto-Process” is selected, simply enter the number of copies to print, then press the
key.
Note:
• When printing is completed, Print Quantity will restore the number originally entered.
• On the Admin. screen, you can make such a setting that “Auto-Process” is always set to ON when you reset or start
the machine.
)p.159
Press the
key.
The Auto-Process indicator turns on.
Note:
• To cancel “Auto-Process”, press the
key
again. The indicator turns off.
• When “Auto-Process” is set to ON and multiple originals are placed in the ADF unit (Option), all originals
will be printed automatically.
• When the ADF unit is installed, the default setting for
“Auto-Process” is set to ON.
)p.159 “Changing Default Settings / OP Auto Process”
64 Automatic Printing [Auto-Process]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 65 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Processing Photos with Dot Screen
[Dot Process]
“Dot Process” function processes photo originals with dot screening in order to print more clearly.
Select from four types of dot patterns.
Important!:
• “Dot Process” is not available when Image Processing mode has been set to “Line” or “Pencil”.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
3
Select a dot pattern.
Ready to Make Master
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Selections
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
OFF
Admin.
Paper
A4
Photo
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
Dot Process
Basic
P .1 / 4
Touch [Dot Process].
Number
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
2
3
4
106
71
53
34
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
Equivalent Lpi
1
Note:
• Touch [OFF] to cancel the “Dot Process”.
4
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen.
“Dot Process” setting is updated.
Processing Photos with Dot Screen [Dot Process] 65
REG-ML_EN.book Page 66 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Adjusting Photo Contrast [Contrast Adj]
For originals that have ill-defined photos, adjust the contrast to print more clearly.
There are two ways to adjust contrast.
Important!:
• If the “Image” is set to “Line”, “Duo” or “Pencil”, “Contrast Adj” cannot be used.
1
Touch [Contrast Adj] on the Functions Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Program
Tone Curve
Job Memory
Multi-Up Print
Dot Process
2 Up
Contrast Adj
Book Shadow
P . 1/4
2
Touch the button of the contrast to use.
Ready to Make Master
Contrast Adj
Basic
Selections
OFF
Cancel
Functions
Lighter
OK
Admin.
Darker
P .1 / 4
• [Lighter]: Lightens dark sections.
Use this setting if the entire photo is underexposed and the target subject of the photo is illdefined.
• [Darker]: Clarifies lighter portions.
Use this setting if the entire photo is overexposed and the target subject of the photo is illdefined.
3
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen. “Contrast Adj”
setting is updated.
66 Adjusting Photo Contrast [Contrast Adj]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 67 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Adjusting Photo Gradation [Tone Curve]
You can adjust the light and shadow portions of a photo by 3 tones respectively.
Important!:
• If the “Image” is set to “Line”, “Tone Curve” cannot be used.
1
Touch [Tone Curve] on the Functions Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Program
Tone Curve
Job Memory
Multi-Up Print
Dot Process
2 Up
Contrast Adj
Book Shadow
P . 1/4
2
Touch the “Lights” and “Shadows”
adjustment buttons.
Ready to Make Master
Tone Curve
Basic
Cancel
Selections
Functions
Gradation Image
Lights
OK
Admin.
Shadows
P .1 / 4
• Lights: Adjusts the portion of the picture most
exposed to light.
• Shadows: Adjusts the portion of the picture
least exposed to light.
Use [+1] or [-1] to strengthen or weaken each
respectively.
3
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen. “Tone Curve”
setting is updated.
Adjusting Photo Gradation [Tone Curve] 67
REG-ML_EN.book Page 68 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Saving Ink [Ink Saving]
Selecting “Ink Saving” makes a master that requires less ink when printing.
Important!:
• This function is not available at the time of printing. It must be selected before the master-making process is
started.
• The ink consumption save process may result in lighter prints than usual.
• “Contrast” and “Print Density Adjustment” functions are not available when “Ink Saving” is selected.
)p.58
)p.93
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
A4
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Touch [Ink Saving].
Ready to Make Master
Ink Saving
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Sorter
P . 3/4
“Ink Saving” is set.
“ Ink Saving” will appear in the message area.
Note:
• “Ink Saving” is a useful function for master-making. Even if this function is set or canceled during
printing, it doesn't reflect on the master that is
currently rolled around the Print Drum (Cylinder).
The setting will be reflected in the next master.
• Even if the “ECO mode” is selected, a
mark
appears in the message area of the basic
screen.
68 Saving Ink [Ink Saving]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 69 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet
[2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
“Multi-Up” function prints multiple originals on one sheet.
‹ 2 Up
Prints two copies of the same original side-by-side on one sheet of paper.
Note:
• Using the ADF unit (Option), two different originals can be printed side-by-side on one sheet of paper.
‹ Multi-Up Print
One or multiple originals (up to 4) can be printed on a single sheet of paper.
The border lines between the originals (shadows) will not be printed and you can get a clearer copy.
“Multi-Up Print” has the following three types:
• Single-Original: A single original is printed multiple times.
• Multiple-Original: Multiple originals are printed multiple times.
• Multi-Up Tickets: You can print multiple long, thin custom originals such as tickets.
Single-Original and Multiple-Original can print in quantities of 2, 4, 8 and 16 respectively.
Important!:
• Use standard-sized paper when using the “Multi-Up” function. With custom-sized paper placed, you cannot perform “Multi-Up” printing even when the size is stored on the Admin. screen.
Note:
• “2 Up” and “Multi-Up Print” functions cannot be used with the following functions.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto-Link (This function is not available for EZ591U)
Top Margin
Book Shadow
Side Margin
Size (Auto)
Format (Auto) (in Scan Mode)
• If you change the “Image” setting between originals in Multiple-Original, you cannot use “Ink Saving”.
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] 69
REG-ML_EN.book Page 70 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Original Orientation and Print Results
The orientation of the original differs depending upon the number of images.
The orientation and print results for each possibility is shown below.
2 Up
Prints two copies of the same original side-by-side on one sheet of paper.
Glass Platen
Multi-Up Print
For Single-Original and Multiple-Original:
Note:
• When “Multiple-Original” is used in Multi-Up Print, the actual number of pages to be scanned is specified. In the
case that the actual number of pages in the document is less than the number of pages specified in the mode settings, set an equivalent number of blank pages in the machine to make up for the specified number. (For example,
if you want to make eight pages and there are only three originals, add a blank page to the originals and set the
four sheets for scanning.)
‹ 2 Up (2 on 1)
Single original
For multiple originals
Glass Platen
2nd original 1st original
Up to 2 originals can be scanned.
70 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 71 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
‹ 4 Up (4 on 1)
Single original
For multiple originals
Glass Platen
2nd original 1st original
Up to 2 originals can be scanned.
‹ 8 Up (8 on 1)
Single original
For multiple originals
Glass Platen
1st original
2nd original
3rd original
4th original
Up to 4 originals can be scanned.
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] 71
REG-ML_EN.book Page 72 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
‹ 16 Up (16 on 1)
Single original
For multiple originals
Glass Platen
1st original
2nd original
3rd original
4th original
Up to 4 originals can be scanned.
‹ For Multi-Up Tickets:
Glass Platen
“Multi-Up Tickets” cannot be used with multiple originals.
The number of images printed is determined by the width of the ticket.
72 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 73 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Margin
Leave a margin of at least 5 mm (3/16") on the top edge of the Glass Platen or the ADF unit (Option). Allowing a proper
margin is critical in well-balanced Multi-Up positioning.
)p.18
Note:
• A margin on the top edge will remain regardless of enlargement or reduction settings.
5mm (3/16")
Set Position
(Top Side)
The Glass Platen
or the ADF unit (Option)
Orientation of Print Paper
Always place paper in the Paper Feed Tray as shown below.
Paper feeding direction
Multi-Up Interval
“Multi-Up” performs scanning for the number of sheets.
The interval between the first scan and the second scan is called “Multi-Up Interval”.
Replace originals or change settings for the second scan during the “Multi-Up Interval”.
Note:
• Default “Multi-Up Interval” can be set on the Admin. screen. The factory default is 15 seconds. )p.161
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] 73
REG-ML_EN.book Page 74 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
2 Up Operation
1
Set the original and print paper.
Important!:
2
• Pay attention to the orientation of the original.
For “2 Up”, make sure to place the original as
shown below.
The same is true when using the ADF unit
(Option).
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id le
Info
Black
• Make sure to load paper as shown below.
3
Touch [2 Up].
Ready to Make Master Multi-Up
Paper output
direction
Note:
• With the ADF unit (Option) you can print two different originals side by side on a single sheet of
paper (2 in 1 printing). Set the two originals one
above the other.
• To print two copies of the same original side by
side on a single sheet of paper (2 Up printing),
set the original on the Glass Platen.
74 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
REG-ML_EN.book Page 75 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
4
Make necessary settings.
Make various settings as needed.
The enlarging/reducing needs to be set depending on
the combination of the original size and printing paper
size.
Original
Printing
Paper
A4
B5
A5
B6
A3
100%
116%
141%
163%
B4
87%
100%
123%
142%
A4
71%
82%
100%
116%
B5
61%
71%
87%
100%
Original
Printing
Paper
A6
B7
A7
B8
A3
200%
---
---
---
B4
173%
200%
---
---
A4
138%
163%
200%
---
B5
122%
141%
173%
200%
Original
Printing
Paper
5
Letter
Statement
Ledger
100%
155%
Legal
82%
127%
Letter
65%
100%
Statement
50%
77%
Press the
key.
Starts scanning of the original.
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] 75
REG-ML_EN.book Page 76 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Operation for Multi-Up Printing
1
Set the original and print paper.
Important!:
4
• Pay attention to the orientation of the original.
)p.70
• Make sure to load paper as shown below.
Select a Page size to use.
Touch the button to match the original size and
touch [Next>].
Ready to Make Master
Page Size
Basic
Selections
Cancel
Functions
Next >
Admin.
Paper output
direction
Note:
P .1 / 4
• It is convenient to place all originals in the ADF
unit (Option) when using the “Multiple-Original”
mode. )p.37
2
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
The enlarging/reducing is automatically set and
the Multi-Up Print screen is displayed.
5
Touch [Single] for Single-Original,
touch [Multiple] for Multiple-Original.
Admin.
Ready to Make Master
Paper
Multi-Up Print
Basic
Selections
Close
Functions
Admin.
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Single
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
Multiple
Ticket
P .1 / 4
3
Touch [Multi-Up Print].
Except for the original placement method, operations for “Single-Original” and “Multiple-Original”
are basically the same. This example is for “Single-Original”.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
76 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 77 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
6
Touch the button of the number of
images to use.
time. Press the
key to cancel the “Multi-Up
Print” mode.
• The Glass Platen and the ADF unit (Option)
cannot be used at the same time. If using the
Glass Platen to scan the first sheet of the original, you must continue to use the Glass Platen
to scan the rest of the original.
• To scan the original with the optional ADF unit
and use the “Single-Original”, you need to set
the original twice.
Note:
To cancel the “Multi-Up Print” settings or return to
the Functions screen, touch [Cancel].
7
Touch [OK].
8
Make necessary settings.
Returns to the Functions screen.
“Multi-Up Print” setting is updated.
The reproduction size is automatically set according to the selected number of images based on
the paper size and original size to use.
• When “Multiple-Original” is used in Multi-Up
Print, the actual number of pages to be scanned
is specified. In the case that the actual number of
pages in the document is less than the number of
pages specified in the mode settings, set an
equivalent number of blank pages in the machine
to make up for the specified number or press the
key in the status of waiting for the next original. Master-making starts.
)p.70 “Original Orientation and Print Results”
• When using the “Auto Process” setting, printing
will continue automatically when originals are
set in the ADF unit (Option).
• To cancel a “Multi-Up Print” setting once it has
been confirmed, follow steps 2 and 3, touch
[OFF] and then [OK] on the screen.
Make various settings as needed.
• When the reproduction size is set before setting
Multi-Up Print, the reproduction size is invalidated and changes to the size setting suitable
for the selected number of images.
• The image of the 2nd original and subsequent
originals can be changed to something different
from the image of the 1st original.
9
Press the
key.
Scanning of the original starts.
After scanning has finished, follow the usual steps
to print.
Important!:
• After displaying the message, “Place Another
Original and Press Start Key
To Cancel, Press Stop Key” the machine waits for
the next original to be loaded. Set the next original
and press the
key while waiting (interval)
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] 77
REG-ML_EN.book Page 78 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Operation for Multi-Up Tickets
For “Multi-Up Tickets”, the specification of the short edge size of the original (the width) is used to calculate the number of images that can be printed on one sheet of paper (long edge of the print paper divided by ticket width). A ticket
width of between 50 mm (131/32") and 210 mm (81/4") can be specified.
Ex.)
Ticket width 50 mm (131/32")
Long edge of the print paper 297 mm (1111/16") (A4 size)
297÷50=5 with a remainder of 47
In this example, 5 images print on one sheet of paper.
original
50 mm (1
31 / 32 ")
Printed paper
297 mm (11 11/ 16")
Paper output
direction
More than
5 mm ( 3/ 16")
1
Blank
Set the original and print paper.
Place the original on the Glass Platen.
3
Touch [Multi-Up Print].
Ready to Make Master
Important!:
• Pay attention to the orientation of the original.
)p.70
• Make sure to load paper as shown below.
Basic
Selections
Functions
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
Paper output
direction
2
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Black
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
78 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
Admin.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 79 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
4
Select a Page size.
Touch either one of the Page size button and
touch [Next>].
(In “Multi-Up Tickets”, the Page Size selection will
not affect the rest of the procedures.)
7
Touch
or
to specify the short
edge size of the original (the width).
Ready to Make Master
Page Size
Basic
Cancel
Functions
Selections
Next >
Admin.
P .1 / 4
Important!:
• If you have enlarged/reduced size in step 9
(setting print functions), be careful about the following points.
The Multi-Up Print screen is displayed.
5
Touch [Ticket].
– Specify the ticket width after enlarging/reducing.
– If you enlarged the size, make sure that the
bigger size does not exceed the specified
“Page Width” or the short edges of the print
paper.
– When enlarging, make sure to prepare paper
that fits the enlarged size.
Ready to Make Master
Multi-Up Print
Basic
Selections
Single
Close
Functions
Multiple
Admin.
Ticket
8
Touch [OK].
9
Make necessary settings.
P .1 / 4
6
Touch [ON].
Returns to the Functions screen.
“Multi-Up Tickets” setting is updated.
Make various settings as needed.
10 Press the
key.
Starts scanning of the original.
After this, please follow the same operations for
normally printing.
You can specify the “Page Width”.
Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print] 79
REG-ML_EN.book Page 80 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Note:
• To cancel a “Multi-Up Print” setting once it has
been confirmed, follow steps 2 and 3, touch
[OFF] and then [OK] on the screen.
80 Printing Multiple Originals on One Sheet [2 Up] [Multi-Up Print]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 81 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Printing from Bound Documents
[Book Shadow]
You can erase the binding “spine” shadow in the center when printing from such bound originals with facing as magazines and books.
The area to be erased (erasure width) can be selected.
Moreover, magazines or books can be spread open on the Glass Platen and their pages printed onto separate sheets.
Important!:
• The original must be placed aligning center on the Glass Platen as shown below.
When erasing the binding shadow or printing an original onto separate sheets by splitting the pages, set the original in the direction of A.
A
B
• The following image areas are also erased (or half-toned).
– A continuous black image area (non-white) from the edge of the original
– A continuous black image area from the center of the original
Note:
• Book Shadow function cannot be used with the following functions.
–
–
–
–
Binding margin
Ink Saving
Scanning Contrast ([Auto])
Multi-Up Print
• If you use the “Book Shadow” with the Gauge Cover installed, the surrounding image gets black on the master.
If the Gauge Cover is installed, remove the Gauge Cover and then use the “Book Shadow”.
• If you are scanning a thick book such as an encyclopedia, raise the hinge of the glass platen cover and press
down for best results.
Printing from Bound Documents [Book Shadow] 81
REG-ML_EN.book Page 82 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
4
• If you set “Process” to “Halftone”, you can only
select “Auto”.
• If you set “Erasure Width” to “Auto”, original
detection is performed automatically, and the
erasure width is calculated from the detected
size.
• If you specify the erasure width, original detection is not performed automatically. Touch [Erasure Width], and then touch the [Page Size] for
the magazine or book you have placed.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
A4
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
Touch [Book Shadow].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
3
Touch [Erase] or [Halftone] for
“Process”.
• [OFF]: Book Shadow is not performed.
• [Erase]: Erases shadows near the center and
around the original.
Select the size of spread original from “Page Size”.
• [Halftone]: Photo processes the center
shadow for a natural feel and deletes shadows
that it can around the original.
82 Printing from Bound Documents [Book Shadow]
Touch [Erasure Width] and [Page
Size].
5
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen. “Book Shadow”
setting is updated.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 83 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and
Printing [Top Margin]
You can cut the top portion of the margin to between 0 to 99 mm (0" to 37/8") and make a master.
This feature enables you to skip the registration marks* on the original and print on the finish-sized paper without any
of these marks.
A margin on the paper periphery is required even if you use “Top Margin” function.
)p.18
* About the Registration Mark
In the field of commercial printing, it is normal to print on paper that is larger than the finished size and then cut down
to the finished size afterwards. The symbol that indicates the position to cut in this event is known as the registration
mark.
Important!:
• When you are setting the “Size”, magnify / reduce using the area that skips the set value.
• Do not use “Auto Reproduction Size”.
• This function cannot be used with “Multi-Up Print” and “2 Up”.
1
Place an original.
Place the original face down on the Glass Platen.
Align center on the top edge, and close Platen
Cover.
3
Touch [Top Margin].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
2
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Touch [ON].
Ready to Make Master
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Cancel
Top Margin
Basic
Selections
Functions
The top margin of
originals can be cut
by a specified range
OK
Admin.
OFF
A4
Line
4
ON
Dot
Process
Black
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P. 2 / 4
Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and Printing [Top Margin] 83
REG-ML_EN.book Page 84 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
5
Touch
width.
or
to specify the cut
Ready to Make Master
Cancel
Top Margin
Basic
Selections
Functions
The top margin of
originals can be cut
by a specified range
OK
Admin.
OFF
ON
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P. 2 / 4
You can set from 0 to 99 mm (0.0" to 3.9").
Note:
• Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter
numbers.
6
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen.
“Top Margin” setting is updated.
84 Cutting the Top Margin of the Original and Printing [Top Margin]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 85 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Adjusting the Side Margins of the Master
[Side Margin]
If you are using the ADF unit (Option) to print multiple originals and need to move the left and right margins to make
a master, use “Side Margin” for one simple operation to offset the margins for all the originals (up to 10 mm (13/32")
left/right).
Important!:
• The “Side Margin” function shifts the location of the original to the right or left. It does not reduce the size of the original.
• By using “Side Margin”, the opposite side of the side margin may be pushed out of the print area and not print.
Check the margins of the original prior to setting.
• This function cannot be used with the following functions.
– Multi-Up Print
– 2 Up
– Overlay
Note:
• This function can be used to set the side margins even when the original is set on the Glass Platen.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
3
Touch [Left] or [Right] to adjust.
Ready to Make Master
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Side Margin
Basic
Selections
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
Admin.
Paper
OFF
Left
Right
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
Shift
A4
(Numeric keypad is
available for input)
P. 2 / 4
4
Touch [Side Margin].
Ready to Make Master
Touch
or
distance.
Ready to Make Master
Side Margin
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
P . 2/4
to specify the shift
Basic
Selections
OFF
Cancel
Functions
Left
OK
Admin.
Right
Shift
(Numeric keypad is
available for input)
P. 2/4
5
You can set from 0 to 10 mm (0" to 13/32").
Adjusting the Side Margins of the Master [Side Margin] 85
REG-ML_EN.book Page 86 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Note:
• Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter
numbers.
5
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen.
“Side Margin” setting is updated.
86 Adjusting the Side Margins of the Master [Side Margin]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 87 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Checking the Print Image Prior to Making
Master [Preview]
You can check what the actual master will look like by previewing an image of the scanned original or an image of
data sent from a computer. This function is handy for checking the layout or final image of a Multi-Up job.
The operation and display timing differ depending upon the mode.
Mode name
(original type)
When set
When to display
If “Auto Processing” is ON
Printing from the Original
Document
When setting functions
related to Master Making
(settings from Functions)
After Scanning the
Original
Scans the original, then
temporarily stops to display
preview.
Scan Mode
When setting functions
(master making functions)
related to Scanning (setting
from Functions)
After Scanning the
Original
When in scan mode, an
original is scanned and then
saved, so there is no “Auto
Process” operation.
However, if multiple originals
are placed in an ADF unit
(Option), you can touch
[Close] after reviewing the
preview to start the scan of
the next original.
Printing Original Data
from a Computer
Stopping the print job prior to
making a master (Pause
before “Master”/Auto
Process OFF), after the
machine has received the
original data
Displays when touching
[Preview]
A preview is not shown if
data is sent from the printer
driver with “Auto-process”.
Retrieving Stored Data
and printing
When retrieving stored data
(set on the Storage Basic
Screen).
Displays when touching
[Preview]
If you touch [Preview], it
displays immediately.
Note:
• Preview shows an image oriented towards output after printing.
• It shows the scanned original as-is. A margin is required when actually printing. Check to make sure that the margins are sufficient.
• In “Direct Print” operation, [Preview] will be displayed on the Master Making Basic Screen when data is received
from the computer.
)p.44
• When in Link mode (when a Linked Printer is connected), the original image after scanning and prior to output from
the Linked Printer is previewed.
Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master [Preview] 87
REG-ML_EN.book Page 88 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Actions Available on the Preview Screen
Preview
Cancel
Continue
25%
1
2
3 4 5
1) Rotate Image Button
6
4) Reduce Button
Allows you to rotate the displayed image 90 degrees.
2) Displays the size of the current display.
3) Enlarge Button
Enlarges the preview display each time it is touched.
Reduces the preview display each time it is touched.
5) Show All Button
Shows the entire image.
6) Scroll Button
The image in the display screen moves in the direction of
the arrow.
Operation for Preview
The operational procedures for “Printing from the Original Document” are explained below.
1
Place an original.
3
2
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
)p.40
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Touch [Preview].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
P . 2/4
Line
A4
“Preview” setting is updated.
Dot
Process
Black
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
88 Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master [Preview]
Admin.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 89 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
4
Make necessary settings.
Note:
You can configure print functions to apply to the
new original as needed.
5
Press the
• Touching [Cancel] will cancel the image,
returning to the Master Making Basic Screen.
To resume preview operation, repeat from step
4.
key.
A scan of the original begins, and can be previewed on the Preview screen.
6
Check the preview image.
Preview
Cancel
Continue
25%
You can use various controls on this screen to
check the image.
)p.88
7
Touch [Continue].
Preview
Cancel
Continue
25%
A master is created.
After this, follow the same operations for normally
making a master.
Checking the Print Image Prior to Making Master [Preview] 89
REG-ML_EN.book Page 90 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum
Printing Area [Max. Scan]
When a master is made, automatic paper size detection and image size adjustment applies to allow appropriate print
margins. This is to prevent paper jams, and to keep internal roller free of ink stains.
By selecting “Max. Scan”, maximum printing area will apply to the scanned image, regardless of the print paper size
or original document size.
Be sure to check the sizes of the original document and the printing paper first.
)p.18
‹ Maximum printing area
EZ591: 291 mm × 425 mm (117/16" × 163/4")
EZ571: 291 mm × 413 mm (117/16" × 161/4")
EZ531: 251 mm × 357 mm (97/8" × 141/16")
Important!:
• The 5 mm (3/16") margin on the top cannot be scanned even in the “Max. Scan” setting.
• Do not use print paper smaller than the area of the image made on the master. This may cause ink stains.
• The entire surface of the Glass Platen must be clean.
By scanning the maximum size, dirt found outside the original document area will also be included in the master.
This may cause the internal roller to be stained with ink.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
A4
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
Touch [Max. Scan].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
P . 2/4
“Max. Scan” is selected.
90 Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum Printing Area [Max. Scan]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 91 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Master-Making
Making a Master that Utilizes the Maximum Printing Area [Max. Scan] 91
REG-ML_EN.book Page 92 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Changing the Print Speed
[Print Speed Adjustment]
You can select the print speed from five levels; from 60 to 130 pages/minute.
The print speed may be changed while printing is in progress.
Note:
• The default print speed can be set on the Admin. screen.
The factory default is level 3 (approximately 100 pages/minute).
)p.159
• When the “ECO mode” is selected, the initial setting for the print speed is set to “3”.
The print speed can be adjusted even while the ECO mode is set to “ON”.
Press the
print speed.
or
key to change the
1)
Print Speed Adjustment Indicator
Shows the current print speed.
2)
Key
Increases the print speed incrementally.
3)
Key
Decreases the print speed incrementally.
Indicator level and print speed
Indicator
Level
Print
Speed
(pages/
minute)
1
2
3
4
5
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
60
80
100
120
130
92 Changing the Print Speed [Print Speed Adjustment]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 93 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Adjusting the Print Density
[Print Density Adjustment]
You can select the print density from five levels.
The print density may be adjusted while printing is in progress.
Important!:
• “Print Density” is not available when [Ink Saving] is selected.
)p.68
Note:
• The default print density can be set on the Admin. screen.
The factory default is set at level 3 (Standard).
)p.159
• When the “ECO mode” is selected, the initial setting for the print density is set to “1”.
The print density can be adjusted even while the ECO mode is set to “ON”.
)p.162 “Changing Default Settings / Print Density Standard/ ECO mode”
Press the
or
print density.
key to adjust the
1)
Print Density Adjustment Indicator
Shows the current print density.
2)
Key
Increases the print density incrementally.
3)
Key
Decreases the print density incrementally.
Adjusting the Print Density [Print Density Adjustment] 93
REG-ML_EN.book Page 94 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Adjusting the Print Position
[Print Position Adjustment]
Use the Vertical Print Position Adjustment keys to adjust the print position in the vertical direction; and use the Horizontal Print Position Adjustment Dial (located on Paper Feed Tray) to adjust it in the horizontal direction.
Adjustment range Vertical direction: ±15 mm (±19/32") Horizontal direction: ±10 mm (±3/8") *
The vertical positioning may be adjusted while Printing is in progress.
*For paper of widths over 297 mm (±1111/16"), the adjustment range in the horizontal direction becomes smaller than
±10 mm (±3/8").
Important!:
• After adjusting the print position, print a proof copy to check the result.
)p.96
Vertical (Up/Down) Adjustment
Press the
or
key to move up or down.
4)
Key
Each press shifts the print position downward in steps of
about 0.5 mm (1/64").
Paper output direction
The Print Basic Screen shows current vertical adjustment.
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
1)
2)
15.0mm.
Center Position Indicator
Indicates when vertical positioning has not changed.
Key
Each press shifts the print position upward in steps of
about 0.5 mm (1/64").
A4
Renew Page
Black
Paper output direction
3)
Key
Press to return to original position.
To restore the original Print Position during printing,
hold the button down for more than 1 second.
When the original Print Position is restored the
indicator will light up.
94 Adjusting the Print Position [Print Position Adjustment]
Admin.
Paper
Reservation
Interval
Idle
Info
REG-ML_EN.book Page 95 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Horizontal (Left/Right) Adjustment
1
Press the Feed Tray Ascent/Descent
Button to lower the Paper Feed Tray.
‹ Turning counter-clockwise
Paper: moves to left
Print Position: moves to right
Feed Tray Ascent/Descent Button
2
Turn the Horizontal Print Position
Adjustment Dial to move horizontally (left or right).
Check the amount of offset from the center by
looking at the gauge beside the Paper Feed
Tray. (Horizontal adjustment cannot be
checked on the Display.)
indicates center on the gauge. Press the
key to verify positioning by proof copy.
Important!:
• Be sure to adjust the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides after moving left or right.
)p.35
• Be sure to re-position the Paper Feed Tray
to center after printing is completed.
‹ Turning clockwise
Paper: moves to right
Print Position: moves to left
Adjusting the Print Position [Print Position Adjustment] 95
REG-ML_EN.book Page 96 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Printing Proof Copies [Proof]
After making adjustments to the print position or density, check the print quality in a proof copy.
Proof copies are not counted towards the number of copies displayed on the Print Quantity Display.
Note:
• The machine will continue to print proof copies if the
• A proof copy cannot be printed from a Linked Printer.
Press the
key.
A single proof copy is printed.
96 Printing Proof Copies [Proof]
key is held down.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 97 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Extending the drying time [Interval]
A sheet of paper is normally fed and printed with each drum (cylinder) rotation, but by extending the paper feed interval, the ink has more time to dry, which prevents ink marks on the back of the next sheet.
The paper feed interval (skip rotation) can be set from 1 - 10.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
4
Touch
or
to set the number of
Skip Rotations for the Print Drum
(Cylinder).
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Select Print Quantity
Admin.
Print Position
Interval
Paper
Basic
Selections
OFF
Cancel
Functions
Reservation
-
Interval
Black
2
Idl e
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P . 3/4
In fo
Touch [Interval].
Note:
• Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter
numbers.
• If you are using extended paper and set the
Print Drum (Cylinder) skip rotation to an odd
number, the actual skip rotation is the “Set
Number +1”.
)p.171
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Sorter
P . 3/4
5
Touch [OK].
Select Print Quantity
Interval
Basic
3
Admin.
Skip Rotation
ON
Renew Page
OK
Touch [ON].
Selections
OFF
ON
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
Skip Rotation
-
Select Print Quantity
Interval
Basic
Selections
OFF
ON
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
Skip Rotation
-
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P . 3/4
Returns to the Functions screen.
Interval setting is updated.
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P . 3/4
Extending the drying time [Interval] 97
REG-ML_EN.book Page 98 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper
and Printing Types
[Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl]
Paper feed and output settings can be adjusted when using special paper or uneven print finishes.
‹ Jump Wing Control
Paper Jumping Wing
The following steps retrieves pre-configured custom settings for
the Paper Jumping Wing. Use this feature to eject certain printing
paper that is hard to eject with automatically adjusted normal
Paper Jumping Wing setting.
Important!:
• “Jump Wing Control” feature is not available unless pre-configured.
• Only one setting can be pre-configured.
• To pre-configure or to change settings, please contact your dealer (or authorized service representative).
Note:
• The Paper Jumping Wing is a device which helps eject printed paper onto the Paper Receiving Tray.
It automatically adjusts according to the position of the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever (Normal or
Card).
‹ Special Paper Ctrl
You can save settings for easy retrieval next time. The “Special Paper Ctrl” menu contains the following options:
Paper Feed Adj.
Adjust Paper Feed Tray position and paper-feed amount to suit special paper characteristics.
For adjustment methods, please contact your dealer (or authorized service representative).
Paper Eject Adj.
Some types of original image/paper may be printed with an uneven or blurred finish due to separation fan settings.
This option can be used to change separation fan and suction fan settings.
For adjustment methods, please contact your dealer (or authorized service representative).
98 Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 99 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Setting the Jump Wing Control
[Jump Wing Control]
1
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
Renew Page
Reservation
Interval
Black
2
Admin.
Paper
Idl e
In fo
Touch [Jump Wing Control].
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Special
Paper Ctrl
Job Separation
Admin.
My Direct Access
Special Paper Ctrl
Jump Wing Control
EditorReport
ID Counter
P . 4/4
“Jump Wing Control” is selected.
Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl] 99
REG-ML_EN.book Page 100 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Saving settings and Renaming the Parameter Names in the
Parameter List
1
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
4
Confirm the adjustments on the Special Paper Ctrl screen.
Special Paper Ctrl
Select Print Quantity
Close
Entry/Call
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
Renew Page
Paper
Reservation
Paper Feed Adj.
S-Tray Upper Limit
Paper-Feed Amount
Paper Eject Adj.
Separation Fan
Suction Fan
Auto
Auto
2
3
Interval
Black
2
Revise
Admin.
Idl e
In fo
Touch [Special Paper Ctrl].
5
Touch [Entry/Call].
Special Paper Ctrl
Close
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Special
Paper Ctrl
Job Separation
Entry/Call
Admin.
Revise
Paper Feed Adj.
S-Tray Upper Limit
Paper-Feed Amount
Paper Eject Adj.
Separation Fan
Suction Fan
Auto
Auto
My Direct Access
Special Paper Ctrl
2
3
Jump Wing Control
EditorReport
ID Counter
P . 4/4
Parameter List screen is displayed.
3
Adjust [Paper Feed Adj.] and [Paper
Eject Adj.].
Note:
• For details of adjustments, see )p.98.
6
Touch an unused button.
Special Paper Ctrl
Close
Parameter List
Close
Entry/Call
Select a Register Frame for a Button
S-Tray Upper Limit
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
A-1Feed AmountA-4
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Air Blow
A-2
Separation
Fan
A-5
Revise
Auto
Auto
2
3
Rename
A-3
Clear
Reseive Tray
A-6
Side
Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line.
Used buttons are grayed-out and are not available.
100 Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 101 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
7
Touch the character buttons to
10 enter
a new name.
Touch [OK].
Special Paper Ctrl
Parameter List
Close
Close
Entry/Call
A-2
S-Tray Upper Limit
Paper
Feedbe
AmountA-4
This Setting
will
A-1
Registered
Air Blow
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
A-2
A-5
Separation
Fan
OK?
Auto
Auto
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Rename
Clear
Reseive Tray
Pre-suction Fan
A-3 Fan
Suction
Cancel
Side
Rename
Revise
OK
Poster
Small
Capital
2
3
A-6
OK
Returns to the Parameter List after the settings
have been registered.
The name of each parameter can be changed for
your convenience. To change parameter names,
proceed to the next step.
Note:
• After registering the settings, touch [Close] on
the Parameter List screen to return to the Special Paper Ctrl screen.
• Touch [Close] on the Special Paper Ctrl screen
to return to the Functions screen. Printing will
be done with the registered settings.
• If you do not wish to print after registering the
settings, press the
key on the control panel.
8
Cancel
Touch [Rename].
Special Paper Ctrl
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small] or
[Capital] button.
)p.130
Note:
• To delete the current name, touch
or press the
key.
button
Touch [OK] after entering all the
11 characters.
Returns to the Parameter List screen and the
name is updated.
Touch [Close].
12 Returns
to the Special Paper Ctrl screen.
Close
Parameter List
Close
Entry/Call
Revise
Select a Button Name to be Changed
S-Tray Upper Limit
Auto
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
Auto
A-1Feed AmountA-4
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Rename
Clear
Reseive Tray
9
Air Blow
A-2
Separation
Fan
A-5
Pre-suction Fan
A-3 Fan
Suction
A-6
2
3
Side
Touch the button to rename.
Unregistered buttons are grayed-out and are not
available.
Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl] 101
REG-ML_EN.book Page 102 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Retrieving Settings from the Parameter List
1
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
4
Touch [Retrieve].
Special Paper Ctrl
Close
Parameter List
Entry/Call
Revise
Select a Button to be Retrieved
S-Tray Upper Limit
Auto
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
Auto
A-1Feed AmountA-4
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
Close
Admin.
Paper
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Air Blow
Poster Fan
Separation
A-5
2
3
Rename
A-3
Renew Page
Reservation
Interval
Black
2
Clear
Reseive Tray
Idl e
5
Select Print Quantity
Selections
Functions
Side
In fo
Touch [Special Paper Ctrl].
Basic
A-6
Admin.
Touch the button to retrieve.
Unregistered buttons are grayed-out and are not
available.
Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl screen and the
desired setting is retrieved.
Confirm the settings made.
Note:
Special
Paper Ctrl
Job Separation
My Direct Access
• Repeat steps 3 to 5 to retrieve other settings.
Special Paper Ctrl
6
Jump Wing Control
EditorReport
ID Counter
P . 4/4
3
Touch [Close].
Returns to the Functions screen and the settings
are updated.
After this, follow the same operations for normal
printing.
Touch [Entry/Call].
Special Paper Ctrl
Close
Entry/Call
Paper Feed Adj.
S-Tray Upper Limit
Paper-Feed Amount
Paper Eject Adj.
Separation Fan
Suction Fan
Revise
Auto
Auto
2
3
Display the Parameter List screen.
102 Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 103 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Making changes to Special Paper Ctrl Setting
1
Display the Parameter List screen.
2
Touch [Retrieve].
Follow steps 1 to 3 ()p.102).
5
Touch [Revise] on the Special Paper
Ctrl screen.
Special Paper Ctrl
Poster
Special Paper Ctrl
Entry/Call
Revise
Close
Parameter List
Close
Entry/Call
Revise
Select a Button to be Retrieved
S-Tray Upper Limit
Auto
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
Auto
A-1Feed AmountA-4
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Close
Air Blow
Poster Fan
Separation
Paper Feed Adj.
S-Tray Upper Limit
Paper-Feed Amount
Paper Eject Adj.
Separation Fan
Suction Fan
+1
+2
2
3
2
3
A-5
Rename
A-3
Clear
Reseive Tray
3
A-6
Side
6
Touch the button to change.
Special Paper Ctrl
Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl screen after
parameters have been revised.
Close
Parameter List
Close
Entry/Call
Select a Button to be Retrieved
S-Tray Upper Limit
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
A-1Feed AmountA-4
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Touch [OK].
Air Blow
Poster Fan
Separation
Revise
A-5
Auto
Auto
2
3
Rename
A-3
Clear
Reseive Tray
4
A-6
Side
Change the setting parameters.
Parameters for the following can be changed:
“Paper Feed Adj.” and “Paper Eject Adj.”.
Note:
• For details of changes, see )p.98.
Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl] 103
REG-ML_EN.book Page 104 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Clearing Special Paper Ctrl Settings
1
Display the Parameter List screen.
Follow steps 1 to 3 ()p.102).
4
Special Paper Ctrl
Important!:
Close
Entry/Call
Revise
Select a Button to be Cleared
+1
P o sAdj.
t e r S-Tray Upper Limit
PaperRegister
Feed
+2
T h i s S e t tPaper
i n A-1
g Feed
w i l lAmount
b e A-4
Parameter List
Rename
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Rename
Clear
Reseive Tray
Clear
Reseive Tray
Close
Pre-suction Fan
A-3 Fan
Suction
Cancel
Side
A-5
2
3
A-6
OK
Close
Entry/Call
Select a Button to be Cleared
S-Tray Upper Limit
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
A-1Feed AmountA-4
3
C l e a r e d Air Blow
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
O
K?
Poster Fan
Separation
Touch [Clear].
Special Paper Ctrl
Close
Parameter List
• First, check whether the setting can be cleared.
(Retrieve the appropriate setting and follow the
steps beginning with step 2.)
• Cleared settings cannot be recovered.
2
Touch [OK].
Air Blow
Poster Fan
Separation
A-5
Pre-suction Fan
A-3 Fan
Suction
A-6
Revise
Returns to the Parameter List screen. The
selected setting is cleared.
+1
+2
2
3
5
Touch [Close].
Returns to the Special Paper Ctrl screen.
Side
Touch the button to clear.
Special Paper Ctrl
Close
Parameter List
Close
Entry/Call
Revise
Select a Button to be Cleared
S-Tray Upper Limit
+1
PaperRegister
Feed Adj.
Paper
+2
A-1Feed AmountA-4
PaperRetrieve
Eject Adj.
Rename
Clear
Reseive Tray
Air Blow
Poster Fan
Separation
A-5
Pre-suction Fan
A-3 Fan
Suction
A-6
2
3
Side
Unregistered buttons are grayed-out and are not
available.
104 Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 105 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Functions for Printing
Paper Feed/Output Settings for Special Paper and Printing Types [Jump Wing Control] [Special Paper Ctrl] 105
REG-ML_EN.book Page 106 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Setting Up User Management [User Management]
This machine is equipped with a User Management function to ensure security and enhance user management.
The User Management function has 3 Management Levels. The following features are available according to level.
Management Level
Feature
High/Full
Management
Mid/ID Print Only
Low/Admin tab
Only
[ID Counter Report] for managing the number
of prints/masters. )p.151
Available
Available
For ID print only
Not Available
[Limit] for setting the upper limit of the number
of copies/masters per user set. )p.117
Available
Available
Not Available
[ID Print] for printing data sent from PC.
)p.44
Available
Available
Not Available
[My Direct Access] for registering the
frequently-accessed functions displayed in the
Direct Access Area. )p.155
Available
Not Available
Not Available
Saving scanned originals for [ID Print].
)p.178
Available
Not Available
Not Available
Allowing only the administrator to change the
[Admin.] settings. )p.165
Available
Available
Available
All users must be registered to manage the machine at the High/Full Management level.
Also, users must input a PIN code (or connect a registered USB Flash Drive) to use the machine.
This section explains settings for using the User Management function and how to make those settings set by the
Administrator.
106 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 107 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Management Level and access timing of user identification access
When “Management Level“ is set to “High/Full Management” or “Mid/ID Print Only”, the users will be asked to identify
themselves (“User identification access”) during operations. The Recognition and Identification System can be
selected from either “PIN code” or “USB Flash Drive” which set by the administrator in advance.
When Operating the Machine
When Outputting the ID Print
User identification access is required
USB Flash Drive
PIN code
or
High/Full
Management
User identification access is not required
OK
User identification access is required
USB Flash Drive
PIN code
or
User identification access
is not required
Mid/ID Print Only
Low/Admin tab only
User identification access is not required
OK
ID Print cannot be performed
User Management Options
To activate the User Management function, the administrator must set up User Management. The setting options of
User Management and details are explained below.
‹ “Recognized by” ()p.109)
Select the Recognition and Identification System.
PIN code: When user identification access is required, input the PIN code.
Set up to 8 digits for each user in “Create User”.
USB Flash Drive: When user identification access is required, connect the registered USB Flash Drive to the USB slot.
Prepare the number of USB Flash Drives for the individual users and register them with the machine.
OFF/Delete: Delete the information registered in User Management (administrator/user registration included),
and return to the factory setting.
Important!:
• If the “Recognized by” setting is changed, all settings in User Management, including the administrator’s registration, will be deleted. Set “Recognized by” first, then operate the other settings.
‹ “Management Level” ()p.111)
Select the Management Level from among 3 levels.
High/Full Management: Users require identifying themselves when operating the machine and outputting the ID Print.
Mid/ID Print Only: Users require identifying themselves when outputting the ID Print.
Low/Admin tab only: Manages the users without any use of security features. Users don't require identifying themselves when operating the machine and cannot perform ID print. This level allows only the administrator to change
the [Admin.] settings.
For details, see the table of )p.106.
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 107
REG-ML_EN.book Page 108 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Create User ()p.112)
Register the administrator/users.
Up to 100 users (administrator included) can be registered.
Set following options when registering.
• PIN code or USB Flash Drive
PIN code: A PIN code can be set for user identification access.
We recommend that you prepare a list of the registered users and record the user registration numbers (ID) and
PIN codes for each user.
Notify each user of the set PIN code and user registration number (ID).
USB Flash Drive: A USB Flash Drive can be set for user identification access.
We recommend that you record which USB Flash Drives you distribute to which user.
Distribute to each user a registered USB Flash Drive and a user registration number (ID).
• Rename
• Group: User groups can be set.
• Limit: The upper limit of the copies/masters can be set.
• Disable: User identification access can be enabled or disabled.
Registered settings can be changed or cleared.
In order to register users or operate other settings in User Management, the administrator must be registered in
advance. The User Management functions are activated after registering the administrator.
‹ Rename Group ()p.121)
Set a group name when operating group management.
Up to 32 groups can be registered.
‹ Reset Counter ()p.122)
Clear the usage counters of all users and groups.
Operation flow of User Management
We recommend that you set up User Management in following order.
Select the
Recognized by
Select the
Management
Level
Create User
(Administrator)
Create User
(User)
*
Setting
the Rename
Group
*Set when you want to count user usage by group using “ID Counter Report”. See )p.151.
108 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 109 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Selecting Recognition and Identification System
Set the Recognition and Identification System using “Recognized by” in advance when setting up User Management.
Important!:
• If “Recognized by” is changed, all settings in User Management, including the administrator’s registration, will be
cleared.
1
Touch [Admin.] on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
3
Identify the administrator.
‹ When “Recognized by” is set to
“PIN code”
Input the administrator’s PIN code.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Ready to make Master
Basic
Auto
Line
Selections
Functions
Admin.
A4
Input the PIN code
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
OK
Cancel
2
Touch [OK].
‹ When “Recognized by” is set to
Ready to Make Master
“USB Flash Drive”
Connect the administrator’s registered USB
Flash Drive to the USB slot.
Ready to make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Insert the registered
USB flash drive
Skip to step 4 if the administrator is not registered.
If the administrator is already registered, the Recognition Screen is displayed here.
See step 3.
Cancel
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 109
REG-ML_EN.book Page 110 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
4
Touch [User Management].
All
Energy Saving Mode
5mn
Display
Power-OFF Schedule
OFF
Default
User Management
System
Protect
Editor
Auto Idling
OFF
12hour
Cancel
User Management
Returns to the User Management screen.
“Recognized by” is updated.
Close
Select management level
High/Full Management
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
Recognized by
Touch the button to select the “Recognized by” option.
Recognized by
OK
OFF/Delete
Touch [Recognized by].
Management level
Close
CAUTION: All registered
users and configurations
which belongs to the user
management will be deleted
OK?
P . 7/9
6
Touch [OK].
Recognized by
Admin.
5
7
Close
PIN Code
USB Flash Drive
OFF/Delete
Note:
• If you touch [OFF/Delete], all settings set in
User Management will be deleted and returned
to the factory setting.
110 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
Continue User Management settings. See the
subsequent pages.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 111 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Setting Up the Management Level
Important!:
• Set “Recognized by” in advance.
)p.109
1
Display the User Management
screen.
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Selecting Recognition and
Identification System” ()p.109).
2
Touch [Management Level].
User Management
4
Touch [OK].
Returns to the User Management screen.
“Management Level” is updated.
You can continue registering users and renaming
groups if needed.
To close the User Management setting, touch
[Close] on the User Management screen to return
to the Admin. screen.
Close
Select management level
Management Level
High/Full Management
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
3
Recognized by
Touch the button to select the “Management Level” option.
Management Level
Cancel
OK
High/Full Management
Mid/ID Print Only
Low/Admin tab only
See )p.106 for details of Management Level
options.
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 111
REG-ML_EN.book Page 112 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Registering Administrator/Users
In order to activate the User Management function, the administrator must be registered.
Up to 100 users can be registered (administrator included).
Note:
• The user registration number (ID) is required when operating “ID print” from the printer driver.
Create User
Close
Select a Register Frame for a Button
Register
0
Admin
5
U-5
Change
1
U-1
6
U-6
Clear
2
U-2
7
U-7
3
U-3
8
U-8
4
U-4
9
U-9
P .1/10
User Registration Number (ID)
‹ Basic operation for registering administrator/users
1
Display the User Management
screen.
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Selecting Recognition and
Identification System” ()p.109)
Important!:
• Set “Recognized by” in advance.
• If you set the group to assign, we recommend
that you set “Rename Group” first. ( )p.121)
2
Touch [Create User].
User Management
Close
Select management level
Management level
High/Full Management
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
112 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
Recognized by
REG-ML_EN.book Page 113 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
3
Touch an unused button.
‹ When “Recognized by” is set to
“USB Flash Drive”
Create User
Connect the registered USB Flash Drive to the
USB slot.
Close
Select a Register Frame for a Button
Register
0
Admin
5
U-5
Change
1
U-1
6
U-6
Clear
2
U-2
7
U-7
3
U-3
8
U-8
4
U-4
9
U-9
Register
Cancel
Rename
U-1
Group
OFF
Limit
OFF
Disable
OFF
OK
Insert the registered
USB flash drive
P .1/10
1
Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line.
Used buttons are grayed-out and are not available. (Another user has been registered.)
The number that identifies the registered USB
Flash Drive is displayed.
Important!:
• Be sure to register the administrator first.
• If the administrator is not registered, buttons are
not available except “0 Admin”.
• The “0” button is only available to the administrator. Even if you rename this button, it will be
treated as the administrator.
4
Note:
• If you register multiple USB Flash Drives, we
recommend that you ready them to be distinguished later (for example, put a user name
on the USB Flash Drive).
• If you input the assigned PIN code (“Recognized by”: PIN code) or connect the USB
Flash Drive that you already registered
(“Recognized by”: USB Flash Drive), the following message is displayed when touching
[OK].
Input the PIN code or connect the
USB Flash Drive.
‹ When “Recognized by” is set to
“PIN code”
Input the PIN code using the Print Quantity
Keys.
Register
Cancel
Rename
U-1
Group
OFF
Limit
OFF
Disable
OFF
This is already registered
Try another
OK
Input the PIN code
Close
Touch [Close] and input the unassigned
PIN code or connect the unregistered USB
Flash Drive.
00000000
(1-8 digits)
5
Up to 8 digits can be input.
Press the
key to clear the PIN code.
Set various settings.
Set the following settings if needed.
•
•
•
•
Rename ()p.115)
Group ()p.116)
Limit ()p.117)
Disable ()p.118)
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 113
REG-ML_EN.book Page 114 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
6
Touch [OK].
7
Touch [Close].
Returns to the Create User screen.
The administrator or the user is registered.
To register multiple users, touch [Register] and
repeat steps 3 to 6.
Returns to the User Management screen.
You can continue registering users and renaming
groups if needed.
To close the User Management setting, touch
[Close] on the User Management screen to return
to the Admin. screen.
114 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 115 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Enter the User Name
1
Touch [Rename] on the Register
screen.
Register
Cancel
3
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Register screen.
The user name is renamed.
OK
Input the PIN code
Rename
U-1
Group
OFF
Limit
OFF
Disable
OFF
00000000
(1-8 digits)
2
Touch the character buttons to enter
a new name.
Rename
Cancel
OK
U-1
Small
Capital
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small] or
[Capital] button.
)p.130
Note:
• To clear the current name, touch
press the
key.
button or
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 115
REG-ML_EN.book Page 116 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Setting the Group to assign
When you set up a group by user, user usage can be counted by group.
It is recommended to enter the group name in advance.
)p.151
1
Touch [Group] on the Register
screen.
Register
Rename
Cancel
Input the PIN code
User 01
Group
OFF
Limit
OFF
Disable
OFF
OK
00000000
(1-8 digits)
2
Touch the Group button to set.
Group
Cancel
OK
Select the group
OFF
1
G-1
6
G-6
2
G-2
7
G-7
3
G-3
8
G-8
4
G-4
9
G-9
5
G-5
10
G-10
P .1/4
Note:
• If you are not setting up a group, touch [OFF].
• The group button can be renamed. See )p.121
3
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Register screen.
The user is assigned to the group that you set.
116 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 117 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Setting the Upper Limit of the User’s Usage
Set the upper limit of the number of copies/masters.
Up to 99,999,999 can be set.
The present copy count and master count can also be cleared.
1
Touch [Limit] on the Register
screen.
Register
Rename
Cancel
User 01
Group
G-1
Limit
OFF
Disable
OFF
OK
Input the PIN code
00000000
(1-8 digits)
2
Touch the limit input box and enter
the upper limit number using the
Print Quantity Keys.
Limit
Cancel
OK
User 01
Limit C/C
0
Present C/C
0
Limit M/C
0
Present M/C
0
C
C
C/C: Copy Count
M/C: Master Count
Note:
• To clear the number, press the
key.
• “Present C/C” and “Present M/C” show the current amount of copies and masters that the user
used.
• To clear the “Present C/C” and “Present M/C”,
touch each
button.
3
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Register screen.
“Limit” is updated.
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 117
REG-ML_EN.book Page 118 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Disabling User identification access
Touch [Disable] on the Register screen
to turn it “ON”.
Register
Rename
Cancel
User01
Group
G-1
Limit
ON
Disable
ON
OK
Input the PIN code
00000000
(1-8 digits)
User identification access is disabled and the user cannot use the machine.
Note:
• To inactivate “Disable”, touch [Disable] to turn it
“OFF”.
• On the Register screen for the administrator, a [Disable] button is not available.
118 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 119 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Changing Administrator/User Registration
1
Display the User Management
screen.
4
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Selecting Recognition and
Identification System” ()p.109)
Touch the User Button to change.
Create User
Close
Select a Button to be Changed
2
Touch [Create User].
User Management
Register
0
Admin
5
U-5
Change
1
U-1
6
U-6
Clear
2
U-2
7
U-7
3
U-3
8
U-8
4
U-4
9
U-9
Close
Select management level
Management level
High/Full Management
P .1/10
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
Registered buttons are displayed with a solid line. Unregistered buttons are grayed-out and are not available.
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
3
Recognized by
Touch [Change].
Create User
5
Change various settings.
6
Touch [OK].
7
Touch [Close].
Close
Follow steps 4 to 5 in “Basic operation for registering administrator/users” ()p.112).
Returns to the Create User screen.
Registered setting is updated.
Select a Button to be Changed
Register
0
Admin
5
U-5
Change
1
U-1
6
U-6
Clear
2
U-2
7
U-7
3
U-3
8
U-8
4
U-4
9
U-9
Returns to the User Management screen.
To close the User Management setting, touch
[Close] on the User Management screen to return
to the Admin. screen.
P .1/10
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 119
REG-ML_EN.book Page 120 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Clearing User Registration
1
Display the User Management
screen.
Registered buttons are displayed with a solid line.
Unregistered buttons and “0 Admin” button are
grayed-out and are not available.
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Selecting Recognition and
Identification System” ()p.109)
2
Important!:
• Once the user registration is cleared, it cannot
be recovered.
Touch [Create User].
User Management
Close
5
Touch [OK].
Select management level
Management level
High/Full Management
Create User
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
Input user and group information
Register
Create User
1 :User 001
Rename Group
Change
1
User 01
6
U-6
Recognized by
3
U-3
8
U-8
9
U-9
4
U-4
Cancel
3
OK
P .1/10
Touch [Clear].
Create User
Returns to the Create User screen.
The setting of the selected user is cleared.
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
Register
0
Admin
5
U-5
Change
1
User 01
6
U-6
Clear
2
U-2
7
U-7
3
U-3
8
U-8
4
U-4
9
U-9
P .1/10
4
U-5
This user will be deleted
ClearO K ?
7
U-7
2
U-2
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
5
Touch the User Button to clear.
Create User
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
Register
0
Admin
5
U-5
Change
1
User 01
6
U-6
Clear
2
U-2
7
U-7
3
U-3
8
U-8
4
U-4
9
U-9
P .1/10
120 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
6
Touch [Close].
Returns to the User Management screen.
To close the User Management setting, touch
[Close] on the User Management screen to return
to the Admin. screen.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 121 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Renaming Groups
1
Display the User Management
screen.
4
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Selecting Recognition and
Identification System” ()p.109)
2
Touch the character buttons to enter
a new name.
Rename
Touch [Rename Group].
OK
G-1
Small
User Management
Cancel
Capital
Close
Select management level
Management level
High/Full Management
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small] or
[Capital] button.
)p.130
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
Recognized by
Note:
3
• You can enter up to 10 characters.
Touch the Group button to rename.
Rename Group
5
Touch [OK].
6
Touch [Close].
Close
Select a Button Name to be Changed
1
G-1
6
G-6
2
G-2
7
G-7
3
G-3
8
G-8
4
G-4
9
G-9
5
G-5
10
G-10
Returns to the Rename Group screen.
The group name is renamed.
Returns to the User Management screen.
To close the User Management setting, touch
[Close] on the User Management screen to return
to the Admin. screen.
P .1/4
Setting Up User Management [User Management] 121
REG-ML_EN.book Page 122 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Reset All User Counters
All user counters can be cleared in a single procedure.
Important!:
• After the counter is cleared, it cannot be recovered.
1
Display the User Management
screen.
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Selecting Recognition and
Identification System” ()p.109)
2
Touch [Reset Counter].
User Management
Close
Select management level
Management level
High/Full Management
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
Reset all counters/Select recognition method
Reset Counter
3
Recognized by
Touch [OK].
User Management
Close
Select managment level
A l l u s eLevel
r’s
Management
c o uHigh/Full
n t e r Managmenet
will be reseted
OK?
Input user and group information
Create User
Rename Group
OK
Reset all counters/Select
recognition method
Cancel
Reset Counter
Recognized by
Returns to the User Management screen.
All user counters are cleared.
To close the User Management setting, touch
[Close] on the User Management screen to return
to the Admin. screen.
122 Setting Up User Management [User Management]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 123 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program]
“Program” feature saves you from repeatedly having to enter how many copies to print, by assigning the number of
copies per sets in advance. Operation stops after printing each set of copies.
Store a “Program” setting for easy retrieval later.
Sample usage for this feature; in a school setting, the number of copies (sheets) per class (set) can be pre-assigned,
then the number of grades (groups) in the entire school.
“Program” consists of two types: “Single” and “Multiple”.
Important!:
• “Program” is not available when “Auto Page Renewal” is selected.
‹ Single Page Mode
From a single original document, print into multiple groups of sets.
A maximum of 50 groups can be created, each having up to 99 sets. Each set can be up to 9999 copies.
The machine can be configured to specify how many copies (sheets) per set, then how many sets are to be created for each group.
Note:
• If you are printing multiple originals with “Single Page” program, place multiple originals (up to 50) in the ADF
unit (option), and as long as “Auto Process” is “ON”, the set program can be repeated and all the originals are
divided into groups to print the various number of copes specified.
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] 123
REG-ML_EN.book Page 124 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Multi-Page Mode
For multiple originals, a different number of copies are printed for each original.
From a single original, up to 9999 copies can be made.
Each original can reproduce a pre-assigned number of sheets (up to 20 originals).
10 sheets
1st original
20 sheets
2nd original
3rd original
30 sheets
A maximum of
9999 sheets
A maximum of
20 originals
Note:
• This function cannot be used for printing from a computer data (direct print).
)p.45
124 Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 125 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
How to Program Print
There are two ways to print in sets using “Program” printing feature.
• Program, then print (without saving the settings) )p.126
• Retrieve a saved program, then print (when program is registered) )p.131
Choose from the following actions on the Print Basic Screen.
Touch a button to proceed.
Ready to Print
Program-A
Basic
03G 2- Selections
Functions
Print Position
Admin.
Paper
0 . 0mm
Renew Page
Go to Next
A4
Cancel Job
Renew Page
Black
Reservation
Interval
Idle
In fo
[Renew Page]: Creates a master from the last Master-Making data. )p.144
[Next Page] or [Go to Next]: Stops current print job, skips to the next original, set or group.
[Cancel Job]: Cancels execution of the Program.
Note:
• The Job Separator (option) is useful for Programed Printing.
The Job Separator releases a piece of tape after each set or original document, thereby automatically separating
sets or groups. It eliminates the need to manually remove a stack of sheets or insert a marker between sets.
Remember to activate “Job Separation” in the Functions screen when printing with the Job Separator.
You must remove each stack from the Paper Receiving Tray, or insert a marker during the pause if not using the
Job Separator.
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] 125
REG-ML_EN.book Page 126 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Setting Up for Programed Printing
There are two ways to display the Program screen.
• Touch [Program] on the Functions screen on the display.
• Press the
key of the Print Quantity Keys.
In the following steps, the explanation will be for pressing the
1
Press the
3
key.
key of the print quantity keys.
Enter the numbers using the Print
Quantity Keys.
‹ For Single Page Mode
Single Page Mode
Program-A
Cps.
Note:
• Press the
key and skip to step 3 of the
“Single Page Mode”. Press the
key and
skip to step 3 of the “Multi-Page Mode”.
2
Touch [Single] or [Multiple].
Ready to Make Master
Program Type
Basic
Close
Admin.
01G
Page(A4)
02G
A4
A4
Line
Single
Dot
Process
Black
Multiple
ReservaD-Feed
Multi-Up
Program List
Check
tion
Print
Idle
Cancel
OK
Total:1280
Sets
Cps.
Sets
Entry/Call
Revise
01G
20
2
04G
50
5
02G
30
1
05G
60
3
03G
40
2
06G
70
10
Clear All
P.1/9
1) Enter the number of copies using the Print
Quantity Keys.
2) Press the
key or the
key.
3) Enter the number of sets (in the group)
using the Print Quantity Keys.
4) Press the
key or the
key.
To program more than one group, repeat steps
1) to 4).
Note:
Editor
Info
• To cancel or change a number, press the
key and enter again.
• To clear all (number of copies and number of
sets), touch [Clear All].
• The total number of all copies to be printed is
shown on the top of the screen.
Important!:
• To save the current Programed Printing setting, touch [Entry/Call].
Once [OK] is touched, the setting cannot be
saved. See “Saving Programs” ()p.128) for
further information.
126 Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 127 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ For Multi-Page Mode
Multi-Page Mode
Program-B
Cancel
OK
Total:21
Cps.
Cps.
Page01
1
Page04
4
Page02
2
Page05
5
Page03
3
Page06
6
Entry/Call
Revise
Clear All
P.1/4
1) Enter the number of copies using the Print
Quantity Keys.
2) Press the
key or the
key.
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to enter the
number of copies for each original.
Note:
•
and
keys can also move the
entry box from top of to bottom.
• To cancel or change a number, press the
key and enter again.
• To clear all (number of copies and number of
sets), touch [Clear All].
• The total number of all copies to be printed is
shown on the top of the screen.
Important!:
• To save the current Programed Printing setting, touch [Entry/Call].
Once [OK] is touched, the setting cannot be
saved.
See “Saving Programs” ()p.128) for further
information.
4
Touch [OK].
Returns to the original screen. Ready to print in
accordance with the program.
Note:
• Alternatively, after entering number of copies or
sets, press the
key to start printing without
touching [OK].
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] 127
REG-ML_EN.book Page 128 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Saving Programs
Store frequently-used Program settings for later retrieval and printing.
A total of 12 settings (Single or Multiple Mode) can be stored.
1
Create and enter a Programed Printing settings.
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Setting Up for Programed
Printing” ()p.126).
2
Touch [Entry/Call] on the Program
screen.
4
Touch [OK].
Program List
Close
Select a Register Frame for a Button
RegisterP - 0 4
This Setting will be
Retrieve
Registered
OK?
Rename
Single Page Mode
Program-A
Cps.
Cancel
OK
Clear
Total:1280
Sets
Cancel
Cps.
Sets
Entry/Call
Revise
01G
20
2
04G
50
5
02G
30
1
05G
60
3
03G
40
2
06G
70
10
Clear All
P.1/9
OK
Returns to the Program List screen. The Program
is stored.
Each Program can be named for your convenience. See step 3 in “Renaming a Program”
()p.129).
Note:
3
Touch an unused button.
Program List
Close
• After saving the Program, touch [Close] on the
Program List screen to return to the Program
screen.
Touch [OK] on the Program screen to print from
a saved Program.
Select a Register Frame for a Button
Register
Single Page Mode
P-04
Retrieve
Rename
Cancel
OK
Total:1280
Cps.
Sets
Cps.
Sets
Entry/Call
Revise
01G
20
2
04G
50
5
02G
30
1
05G
60
3
03G
40
2
06G
70
10
Clear
Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line.
Used buttons are grayed-out and are not available.
128 Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program]
P.1/9
Clear All
REG-ML_EN.book Page 129 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Renaming a Program
Program names can be changed to better describe their usage or purpose.
1
Touch [Program] on the Functions
screen.
3
Touch [Rename].
Program List
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Close
Select a Button Name to be Changed
Register
P-01
P-05
P-09
Retrieve
P-02
P-06
P-10
Rename
P-03
P-07
P-11
Clear
P-04
P-08
P-12
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
Note:
• Each Program button has an icon on top left.
indicates Single Page Mode Program,
indicates Multi-Page Mode Program.
Note:
• If [Program] button is already highlighted,
touching it will again display the Program
screen, and not the Rename a Program screen.
Touch [Cancel Job] then [OK] to return to
Functions screen. Touch [Program] again.
2
Touch [Program List].
4
5
Program Type
Touch the character buttons to enter
a new name.
Rename
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Select a program to rename.
Cancel
OK
Close
Selections
01G
Functions
Admin.
Small
Capital
02G
Single
Multiple
Program List
P. 1/9
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small] or
[Capital] button. )p.130
Note:
• To delete the current name, touch
or press the
key.
6
button
When entered, touch [OK].
Returns to the Program List screen. The program
is renamed.
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] 129
REG-ML_EN.book Page 130 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Tip:
Rename screen
‹ Small
Rename
Small
Cancel
OK
Cancel
OK
Capital
‹ Capital
Rename
Small
Capital
Note:
• You can enter up to 10 characters.
• Print Quantity Keys may also be used for entering numbers.
•
button or
key clears previously
saved or current entry. Touch to clear one character at a time.
130 Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 131 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Retrieving a Program
Retrieve a stored program and modify its settings.
1
Press the
4
key.
Touch [OK].
Single Page Mode
Program-A
Cps.
2
Admin.
Image
02G
A4
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Black
3
Multiple
ReservaD-Feed
Multi-Up
Program List
Check
tion
Print
Idle
Cps.
04G
02G
05G
03G
06G
Sets
Entry/Call
Revise
Clear All
Returns to the original screen. Ready to print
using the retrieved program.
Close
01G
Single
Sets
P.
Ready to Make Master
Program Type
OK
To t a l
01G
Touch [Program List].
Basic
Cancel
Note:
• To cancel the program printing, press the
key (or touch [Functions]→[Program]) and
then touch [Cancel Job] on the next screen
displayed. Canceling program printing by
pressing the
key will reset other settings.
Editor
Info
Touch a button to select a Program
to retrieve.
Program List
Close
Select a Button to be Retrieved
Register
Program-A
Pattern-A
P-09
Retrieve
Program-B
Program-X
P-10
Rename
Program-C
P-07
P-11
Clear
Job 1
P-08
P-12
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] 131
REG-ML_EN.book Page 132 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Clearing Programs
1
Display the Program List screen.
2
Touch [Clear].
Follow steps 1 to 2 in “Retrieving a Program”
()p.131).
Program List
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
3
Register
Program-A
Pattern-A
P-09
Retrieve
Program-B
Program-X
P-10
Rename
Program-C
P-07
P-11
Clear
Job 1
P-08
P-12
Select a program to clear.
Program List
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
4
Register
Program-A
Pattern-A
P-09
Retrieve
Program-B
Program-X
P-10
Rename
Program-C
P-07
P-11
Clear
Job 1
P-08
P-12
Touch [OK].
Program List
Close
Select a Register Frame for a Button
Register
Program-AP-01
This SettingP-02
will be
Cleared
OK?
Rename
P-03
Retrieve
Clear
P-04
Cancel
P-05
P-09
P-06
P-10
P-07
P-11
P-08
OK
P-12
Returns to the Program List screen. The program
is cleared.
132 Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 133 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Making changes to Stored Programs
1
Retrieve a program to modify.
2
Make changes to the Program.
Follow steps 1 and 3 in “Retrieving a Program”
()p.131).
Modify number of copies or sets in the current
screen.
Note:
• See “Setting Up for Programed Printing”
()p.126) for details on how to set up a program.
3
Touch [Revise].
Single Page Mode
Program-A
Cps.
Cancel
OK
To t a l
Sets
Cps.
01G
04G
02G
05G
03G
06G
Sets
Entry/Call
Revise
Clear All
P.
4
Touch [OK].
Single Page Mode
Program-A
Cps.
01G
02G
03G
Cancel
OK
To t a l
Sets
Cps.
Program-A
This Setting 04G
will be
Revised
OK?
05G
06G
Cancel
Sets
Entry/Call
Revise
OK
Clear All
P.
Returns to the Program screen. “Program” settings are updated (overwritten).
Automatic Sorting Into Groups [Program] 133
REG-ML_EN.book Page 134 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory]
Save the settings of the last print job into “Job Memory”. Simply retrieve those “Job Memory” settings when doing a
similar print job. Up to 10 jobs can be saved.
The following attributes can be saved to “Job Memory”.
‹ MasterMaking/Print
Image
Max. Scan
Print Quantity
Interval
Dot Process
Book Shadow
Print Speed
ADF Semi-Auto*1
Contrast
Multi-Up Print
Print Density
Job Separation*1
Ink Saving
Top Margin
Print Position
Auto Page Renewal
Size
Contrast Adj
Paper Feed Adj.
Separation Fan
Margin+
Tone Curve
Jump Wing Control
Suction Fan
Paper Size
Side Margin
Auto Process
*1 Available with optional device
‹ Link Mode (available with Linked Printer)
Image
Feed Tray
Print Quantity
Punch*
Dot Process
Book Shadow
Duplex*
Mailbox*
Contrast
Top Margin
Printer Collate*
Output Reversal*
Size
Contrast Adj
Offset Pages*
Margin+
Tone Curve
Staple*
*: Available with optional device
134 Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 135 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Storing Job Memory
1
2
Set various settings for a print job.
• If you pressed the
key to open the
screen, first touch [Register] then select an
available button.
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master <Multi-Up>
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
5
M-1
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
Cancel
OK
P. 1 / 3
Register
Image
Dot Process
Contrast
Ink Saving
Size
Margin+
Paper Size
Max. Scan
Book Shadow
Multi-Up Print
A4
Dot
Process
Photo
OFF
2
OFF
OFF
Auto
OFF
OFF
2 Up
Touch [Job Memory].
Touch
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
and scroll down to check all items.
Note:
Functions
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
• To change a setting, touch [Cancel] and start
over again. (Return to step 1.)
6
P . 1/4
4
Confirm settings.
Status Check
Admin.
Paper
Photo
3
Note:
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Job Memory screen. Settings are
updated.
Each job memory can be named for your convenience. See step 3 in “Renaming a Job Memory”
()p.136).
Touch an unused button.
Job Memory
Close
Select a Register Frame for a Button
Register
M-1
M-6
Retrieve
M-2
M-7
Rename
M-3
M-8
Clear
M-4
M-9
M-5
M-10
Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line.
Used buttons are grayed-out and are not available.
Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory] 135
REG-ML_EN.book Page 136 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Renaming a Job Memory
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
4
Job Memory
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
A4
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
5
Ready to Make Master
Selections
M-1
M-6
Retrieve
M-2
M-7
Rename
M-3
M-8
Clear
M-4
M-9
M-5
M-10
Unregistered buttons are grayed-out and are not
available.
Touch [Job Memory].
Basic
Register
Paper
Line
Reservation
Close
Select a Button Name to be Changed
Auto
Dot
Process
Select a Job Memory to rename.
Functions
Touch the character buttons to enter
a new name.
Admin.
Rename
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
Cancel
OK
M-1
Small
Capital
P . 1/4
3
Touch [Rename].
Job Memory
Close
Select a Button Name to be Changed
Register
M-1
M-6
Retrieve
M-2
M-7
Rename
M-3
M-8
Clear
M-4
M-9
M-5
M-10
136 Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory]
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small] or
[Capital] button.
)p.130
Note:
• To clear the current name, touch
press the
key.
button or
REG-ML_EN.book Page 137 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
6
When entered, touch [OK].
Rename
Small
Cancel
OK
Capital
Returns to the Job Memory screen. The name is
updated.
7
Touch [Close].
Returns to the Functions screen.
Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory] 137
REG-ML_EN.book Page 138 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Retrieving a Job Memory and Printing
There are two ways to display the Job Memory screen.
• Touch [Job Memory] on the Functions screen on the display.
• Press the
key of the Print Quantity Keys.
In the following steps, the explanation will be made for touching the display.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
3
Job Memory
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Touch [Retrieve].
Close
Select a Button to be Retrieved
Admin.
Register
Paper
Retrieve
Auto
Rename
A4
Line
Clear
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
4
Touch [Job Memory].
Select a Job Memory to retrieve.
Job Memory
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Close
Select a Button to be Retrieved
Register
Admin.
Retrieve
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Rename
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Clear
Dot Process
Top Margin
P . 1/4
Note:
• A job setting can also be retrieved using the
Print Quantity Keys.
M-1 to 9:
to
M-10:
5
Confirm the settings and touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen. Ready to print
using the retrieved job settings.
Continue with the normal printing processes.
Note:
• To cancel a retrieved job memory, press the
key.
138 Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 139 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Tip:
Quick Retrieval
A job setting can be retrieved via hardware keys
without touching the Touch Screen.
For example, to retrieve and print job M-2, press
the
,
,
key in that order. M-2 is
retrieved and starts the master-making process.
Job Memory
Close
Select a Button to be Retrieved
Register
Retrieve
Rename
Clear
Registration Number
Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory] 139
REG-ML_EN.book Page 140 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Clearing Job Memory
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
4
Job Memory
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Select a Job Memory to clear.
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
Admin.
Register
Paper
Retrieve
Auto
Rename
A4
Line
M-2
Clear
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
Important!:
Touch [Job Memory].
• Make sure it is the job setting you want to
delete.
• Once the Job Memory is cleared, it cannot be
recovered.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
5
Status Check
RISO NEWS
Top Margin
Touch [Clear].
Job Memory
Cancel
Photo
OFF
2
OFF
OFF
Auto
OFF
OFF
2 Up
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
Register
Retrieve
Rename
Clear
140 Using Job Memory Functions [Job Memory]
6
OK
P. 1 / 3
Clear
Image
Dot Process
Contrast
Ink Saving
Size
Margin+
Paper Size
Max. Scan
Book Shadow
Multi-Up Print
P . 1/4
3
Touch [OK].
Touch [Close].
Returns to the Functions screen.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 141 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Protecting Confidential Documents
[Confidential]
After printing is complete, the master remains on the Print Drum (Cylinder) and is ready for printing another set of
copies. To protect confidential documents from unauthorized duplication, use the Confidential feature to discard the
master after printing.
Note:
• When “Confidential” is performed, the discarded master may no longer be reproduced, and “Renew Page” feature
is disabled.
• If “Idling Action” is set to “ON”, “Idling Action” is executed using a confidential master (use this function when not
using the Print Drum (Cylinder) for extended periods of time).
• You can set the machine to remind users to use the “Confidential” feature every time it is used.
)p.173
1
Make sure printing is completed.
2
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
Confirm that everything is printed.
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
4
Touch [OK].
Select Print Quantity
Confidential
Basic
Selections
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
Confidential Mode
Functions
Admin.
Print Position
Paper
0 . 0mm
P .3 / 4
A4
Renew Page
Reservation
Interval
Black
3
The current master is discarded, and a new master is set on the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Id l e
In fo
Touch [Confidential].
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Sorter
P . 3/4
Protecting Confidential Documents [Confidential] 141
REG-ML_EN.book Page 142 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Extending the Reserve Period [Reservation]
This function is useful when the machine is connected to a computer. When the machine is inactive for a certain
period of time, it determines that the current job is completed, even if the actual printing is still under way.
If another person accidentally initiates another job from the computer, this will cause a new master to be made, discarding the current one.
By extending “Reserve Period”, such interruption can be prevented. We recommend that you activate the “Reservation” setting when temporarily pausing a job or when printing leaflets, etc. to prevent interruption.
Note:
• Select from 5, 10, or 30 minutes as the “Reserve Period” on the Admin. screen. The factory default is 5 minutes.
)p.161
• The following operations do not count towards reservation period.
–
–
–
–
When the machine is operating (making a master, printing, confidential action, idling, etc.)
When the Job Separator (option) is operating
When Control Panel buttons are being entered
When the setup screen for some function is displayed
• Auto Sleep and Auto Power-OFF will be disabled during the reservation period.
Auto Sleep/Auto Power-OFF: timer re-activates after the reservation period is up.
Power-OFF Schedule: Will not shut off until next day on time.
)p.162
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
Touch [Reservation].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
P . 2/4
Reservation period is extended.
142 Extending the Reserve Period [Reservation]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 143 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Idling Action [Idling Action]
When the machine has not been used for an extended period of time, or when the Print Drum (Cylinder) is replaced,
the first several copies may be printed too light. By performing “Idling Action” before making a master, high print quality may be instantly achieved and reduce paper waste.
Important!:
• “Idling Action” is effective only in conjunction with the master-making process. When performing print processes
only, “Idling Action” will have no effect.
Note:
• To perform “Idling Action” automatically when making a master after a specified period of time since the last print
job, set “Auto Idling” on the Admin. screen.
)p.163
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
The following screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Idling...
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
After “Idling Action” has been finished, the mastermaking process is started.
Touch [Idling Action].
Note:
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Sorter
• Remember to load the originals before pressing
the
key as the master will be made immediately after “Idling Action” finishes.
• If
displays in the screen message area
even though it is not set, this indicates that the
“Auto Idling” time has elapsed. If you make a
master in this status, “Idling Action” is executed.
Ready to Make Mast
Master
P . 3/4
Basic
Selections
Functions
appears on screen.
3
Press the
key.
Idling Action [Idling Action] 143
REG-ML_EN.book Page 144 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Reproducing the Master
[Renew Page][Auto Page Renewal]
The data from the last master-making process is temporarily stored on the machine.
Using this data, another master can be reproduced without repeating steps to scan the same original.
You can “Rotate” the original and recreate a master.
“Auto Page Renewal” is a function that automatically recreates a master when a specified number of pages are
printed. If you are printing a large-volume job of thousands or tens of thousands of copies, the master may degrade
before the job is completed.
If you set “Auto Page Renewal” to “ON” prior to starting a large-volume print job, a master will be automatically re-created
when the specified number of copies is reached (Auto Renewal Point). This allows you to maintain a consistent print quality
from start to finish.
Note:
• “Renew Page” works with data sent from a computer as well. However, if multiple pages exist, only the last page
will be processed with “Renew Page”.
• “Renew Page” function is not available:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
immediately after startup
after pressing the
key
after executing “Auto Clear” (“Changing Default Setting” )p.161)
after performing “Confidential”
after performing “Multi-Up Print”
after performing “Book Shadow”
when an error has occurred during master-making
after performing “Link Print”
after master-making for Data Output Mode (when the optional Key Card Counter is installed.)
after Idling Action has been executed, excluding with following conditions.
– displaying the preview
– overlaying
– while in “Book” mode
• The number of pages in the proof copy when using “Auto Page Renewal” can be adjusted using “Admin.”. )p.163
• Once the print position has been adjusted the new position is saved when master-making is resumed, avoiding the
need for readjustment.
144 Reproducing the Master [Renew Page][Auto Page Renewal]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 145 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Using Page Renewal
1
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
• To cancel “Rotate”, touch [Rotate] again.
Select Print Quantity
Renew Page
Basic
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
Selections
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
Admin.
Master Renewal Mode
Paper
Rotate
Renew Page
P .4 / 4
Reservation
Interval
Black
2
Idl e
In fo
3
Touch [Renew Page].
Touch [OK].
Select Print Quantity
Renew Page
Basic
Selections
Cancel
Functions
OK
Admin.
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Job Separation
Master Renewal Mode
Rotate
P .4 / 4
“Renew Page” begins reproducing the master.
P . 3/4
Note:
• If you touch and select [Rotate], you can rotate
the original 180 degrees for renewing the master.
• When “Rotate” is set, the machine rotates 180
degrees for renewing the master while executing “Auto Page Renewal”.
Reproducing the Master [Renew Page][Auto Page Renewal] 145
REG-ML_EN.book Page 146 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Using Auto Page Renewal
In order to use “Auto Page Renewal”, you must enable it in “Admin.” prior to use.
If “Auto Page Renewal” is activated and “Auto Page Renewal” is set to “ON”, “Auto Page Renewal” can be executed
during a print job.
Important!:
• If “Auto Page Renewal” is not activated in “Admin.”, “Auto Page Renewal” cannot be set to “ON”.
)p.163
• The “Auto Page Renewal” is set to “OFF” in the following instances.
– When printing with “Program”
– When the
or the
is pressed
– When attempting to process the next job with direct print
Note:
• The factory settings are such that a master is recreated every 1000 copies, with a setting to print 3 proofs. This setting can be changed in “Admin.”. )p.163
Turning ON “Auto Page Renewal”
1
Touch [Functions] on the Print Basic
Screen.
When you print with these settings, “Auto Page
Renewal” will be executed after the specified
number of copies are printed.
Note:
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Print Position
Renew Page
Paper
Reservation
Interval
Black
2
Admin.
• If [Auto Page Renewal] is grayed-out, go to
“Admin.” and turn “Auto Page Renewal” ON.
)p.163
Idl e
In fo
Touch [Auto Page Renewal].
Select Print Quantity
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Job Separation
P . 3/4
“Auto Page Renewal” is activated.
146 Reproducing the Master [Renew Page][Auto Page Renewal]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 147 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Proof and Print
(with the ADF unit (Option) installed)
[ADF Semi-Auto]
Selecting “Auto Process” with the ADF unit (Option) installed automatically performs the complete printing job, but
you cannot make proof copies, or any necessary adjustments of each master. To pause for check after printing a
proof copy of each master, select “ADF Semi-Auto”.
Important!:
• Turn “Auto Process” OFF when using “ADF Semi-Auto”.
)p.64
Note:
• The default “ADF Semi-Auto” can be set on the Admin. screen.
)p.159
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
3
Place original(s) in the ADF unit
(Option).
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
2
4
Touch [ADF Semi-Auto].
Selections
Functions
Enter the number of copies using the
Print Quantity Keys.
The number is displayed on the Print Quantity Display.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
The ADF unit (Option) detects the document, and
automatically opens the Master Making Basic
Screen
Note:
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
• To change the number, press the
then re-enter the correct number.
key,
P . 2/4
“ADF Semi-Auto” is selected.
Proof and Print (with the ADF unit (Option) installed) [ADF Semi-Auto] 147
REG-ML_EN.book Page 148 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
5
Press the
key.
After a master is made, a proof copy is printed and
the job stops.
6
Check the proof copy.
7
Press the
Make adjustments if needed.
key.
The machine prints specified number of copies.
Master for the next original is made, its proof copy
is printed, then the machine stops again.
Repeat steps 6 and 7.
148 Proof and Print (with the ADF unit (Option) installed) [ADF Semi-Auto]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 149 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Showing Usage Status [Meter Display]
The machine can record and display the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A4/Letter and Under: Total number of copies A4/Letter-sized and smaller that have been printed.
Above A4/Letter: Total number of copies larger than A4/Letter that have been printed.
Total: The total number of copies printed by the machine.
A3/Ledger Master Count: Total number of A3/Ledger-sized masters that have been made.
A4W/LetterW Master Count: Total number of A4W/LetterW-sized masters that have been made.
Master Count: The total number of masters made by the machine.
Print Drum (Cylinder) Meter: The number of copies that have been printed with the current drum (cylinder).
Job Count: Start and stop as needed.
For example, to keep track of the number of copies made in a day, set “Job Count” to 0 in the morning, and check
the counter at the end of the work day to get the count.
Note:
• When using more than one Print Drum (Cylinder), install the Print Drum (Cylinder) for which you need information
before displaying the Meter Display screen.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
3
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Black
Review counts.
A4/Letter and Under
0
Above A4/Letter
0
Total
0
A3/Ledger Master Count
0
A4W/LetterW Master Count
0
Master Count Total
0
Print Drum Meter
0
Note:
2
• Using the “Job Count”
Touch [Meter Display].
1) Touch
to set the counter to 0.
2) Touch [Close] to close the Meter Display
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
3)
Admin.
Meter Display
Multi-Up Print
Program
2 Up
Job Memory
Book Shadow
Dot Process
Top Margin
4
screen. Operate the machine as normal.
To display and review the Job Count, follow
steps 1 and 2.
Touch [Close] to close the window.
Returns to the Function screen.
P . 1/4
Showing Usage Status [Meter Display] 149
REG-ML_EN.book Page 150 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Rotating the Original 180 Degrees to Make a
Master [Rotate]
When you are direct printing, you can rotate the original data received from a computer 180 degrees to make a master. When this function is used for the original data of a wide range of solid colors (colours) on the top side, you can
prevent paper jams.
After the machine receives the original
data, touch [Rotate] on the Functions
Screen.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Auto Page Renewal
Special Paper Ctrl
Rotate
P . 2/2
“Rotate” setting is updated.
Note:
• When you send the original data from a computer,
set “Auto Process” to [OFF] or [Pause before “Master”].
150 Rotating the Original 180 Degrees to Make a Master [Rotate]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 151 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Checking User Counters [ID Counter Report]
Each user can output counter data (number of prints, etc.) when checking usage status.
Important!:
• “ID Counter Report” can be outputted only when the “User Management” function is set.
‹ Report Output
Counter data can be outputted by following methods.
• Print
Prints the counter data.
• E-mail
E-mail attached with the counter data is sent to the e-mail addresses set as the destination.
The mail settings must be set in advance. For details on mail settings, the RISO Network Card is required. For
details, see the “RISO Network Card User’s Guide”.
• USB Flash Drive
Outputs the counter data to the USB Flash Drive.
USB Flash Drive must be connected to the USB slot in advance.
Note:
• By using the “RISO Utility Software” (RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER) included on the provided CD-ROM, the
counter data output to the USB Flash Drive can be managed by a computer.
For details, see the “RISO Utility Software User’s Guide”.
Setting the reminder date
For regular counting, a reminder date can be set.
The following screen is displayed on the set date.
Please inform this message
to your administrator
Due date for
ID counter report
Close
Important!:
• To manage usage status correctly, the following setting is required. If you do not make the following setting, you
cannot count the number of prints/masters correctly.
– Set [Management Level] to [High/Full Management] in User Management. )p.106
– If you print from the computer, be sure to use “ID Print”. See the “RISO Printer Driver User’s Guide” for detail.
Checking User Counters [ID Counter Report] 151
REG-ML_EN.book Page 152 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Outputting the Counter Report
1
Touch [Functions] on the Basic
Screen for each mode.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
3
Touch the button of the desired output method.
ID Counter Report
Admin.
Report Output
Close
Print
Paper
E-mail
Auto
Dot
Process
USB Flash Drive
A4
Line
Reservation
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Monthly Reminder
Set Date
Stop Reminder
Black
2
Touch [ID Counter Report].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Special
Paper Ctrl
Job Separation
Admin.
My Direct Access
Special Paper Ctrl
Jump Wing Control
EditorReport
ID Counter
P . 4/4
152 Checking User Counters [ID Counter Report]
Returns to the Basic screen after output.
If the mail setting is not set, [E-mail] is not available.
Consult your dealer (or authorized service representative) about mail settings.
If the USB Flash Drive is not connected, [USB
Flash Drive] is grayed-out and is not available.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 153 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Setting Up the Monthly Reminder
1
Touch [Functions] on the Basic
Screen for each mode.
4
Touch
date.
or
to set the reminder
Set Date
Ready to Make Master
Cancel
OK
Reminder will be displayed on the date below
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Date
Auto
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
OFF
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
If the [Date] button is grayed-out, touch [OFF] and
input the date.
Touch [ID Counter Report].
Note:
• Print Quantity Keys can also be used to enter
numbers.
• The set date can be selected between 1 and 31.
• When setting the reminder date between the
29th - 31st, and if the number of days in the
month is less than this range such as in February, the reminder screen is displayed on the last
day of the month.
• If you are not setting the reminder date, touch
[OFF].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Special
Paper Ctrl
Job Separation
Admin.
My Direct Access
Special Paper Ctrl
Jump Wing Control
EditorReport
ID Counter
P . 4/4
3
20
A4
Line
5
Touch [Set Date].
Touch [OK].
Set Date
ID Counter Report
Report Output
Close
Cancel
OK
Reminder will be displayed on the date below
Print
Date
20
E-mail
USB Flash Drive
OFF
Monthly Reminder
Set Date
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Stop Reminder
Returns to the ID Counter Report screen.
The reminder date is updated.
Checking User Counters [ID Counter Report] 153
REG-ML_EN.book Page 154 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
6
Touch [Close].
ID Counter Report
Report Output
Close
Print
E-mail
USB Flash Drive
Monthly Reminder
Set Date
Stop Reminder
Returns to the Functions screen.
Note:
• Once the reminder date is set, a “reminder
screen” is displayed on each reminder date. In
fact, this message is displayed each time the
machine is turned ON until the counter report is
output. If you do not want to output the counter
data on the set date of this month, touch [Stop
Reminder]. The reminder screen is not displayed until the reminder date of the next
month.
154 Checking User Counters [ID Counter Report]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 155 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Customizing the Direct Access Area
[My Direct Access]
Normally, the functions displayed in the Direct Access Area of the Basic Screen are already registered by default setting or changed by the administrator. However, if User Management is set up, each user can register the functions
displayed in the Direct Access Area using “My Direct Access”.
The functions that can be displayed in the Direct Access Area can individually be registered in each mode (Master
Making/Print/Scanning).
Up to 4 functions can be registered.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
A4
Reservation
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Direct Access Area
“My Direct Access” kept by each user can be displayed after the user has been identified and cannot be changed by
other users.
Note:
• “My Direct Access” can be set when “Management Level” is set to “High/Full Management” in “User Management”.
• If “My Direct Access” is not set, the functions registered via the usual methods are displayed in the Direct Access
Area. ()p.168)
1
Touch [Functions] on the Basic
Screen for each mode.
2
Touch [My Direct Access].
Ready to Make Master
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Basic
Selections
Functions
Special
Paper Ctrl
Job Separation
Admin.
Paper
Admin.
My Direct Access
Special Paper Ctrl
Jump Wing Control
Auto
A4
Line
EditorReport
ID Counter
Dot
Process
Black
Reservation
P . 4/4
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
If “Management Level” is not set to “High/Full Management” in “User Management”, the [My Direct
Access] button is grayed-out and is not available.
Note:
• Consult your administrator for Management
Level.
Customizing the Direct Access Area [My Direct Access] 155
REG-ML_EN.book Page 156 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
3
Select a mode tab to register new
buttons.
My Direct Access
MasterMake
Printing
Cancel
Note:
• Touch
or
to display more functions if necessary.
• To remove a function that is accidentally
assigned, touch [No Entry].
• Functions already assigned are grayed-out and
are not available.
• Some functions display only when optional
devices are installed.
OK
Scanning
Frame1
Frame2
Frame3
Frame4
Renew Page
No Entry
No Entry
No Entry
6
Touch [OK].
Function List
Cancel
OK
No Entry
4
Select a button to assign a function
to.
My Direct Access
MasterMake
Printing
Cancel
OK
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Job Separation
Scanning
P . 3/4
Frame1
Frame2
Frame3
Frame4
Renew Page
No Entry
No Entry
No Entry
Returns to “My Direct Access” screen. The
selected functions are added.
To add more functions or to replace a button with
another function, repeat step 3 to 6.
7
If the button has a function already assigned to it,
the newly selected function will overwrite the previous function.
5
Editor
Select a function to assign.
Function List
Cancel
OK
No Entry
Editor
Interval
Idling Action
Renew Page
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Ink Saving
Job Separation
P . 3/4
156 Customizing the Direct Access Area [My Direct Access]
Touch [OK].
Returns to the Functions screen.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 157 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Changing Default Settings [Admin.]
The default settings can be modified to best suit your needs.
They may be edited as needed.
Important!:
• If the administrator is registered in User Management, only the administrator can change the [Admin.] settings.
(This operation requires input of the administrator's PIN code or connection of the registered USB Flash Drive.)
)p.165, )p.106
• Depending upon the usage environment, the “Admin.” features may not be available (the “Admin.” tab may not be
displayed).
Consult your dealer (or authorized service representative) for details.
Note:
• The default settings are the values restored when the machine is turned ON or when the
key is pressed.
Configurable Functions
:Initial setting (factory default)
* This function can be set only when the option is installed.
Display Access
Button
Functions
Description
DirectAccess Entry
Store frequently-used functions on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
)p.168
Selections Entry
Store frequently-used functions on the Selections
screen for each mode.
)p.168
Display Priority
Select first screen to display following the Startup.
Mode Screen/RISO Print/
(Scanning)
Note:
• The Mode Screen is available only when “Mode Key
Pattern” is set to “Mode Selection”.
[Display]
Mode Key Pattern
Select screens to display when the
pressed.
Mode Selection/Loop
key is
[Mode Selection]
Pressing the
key will open the Mode Screen no
matter which screen you are currently on.
[Loop]
The screen changes as shown below when the
key is pressed.
• Normally: “Master Making Basic Screen”←→”Print
Basic Screen”
• When a Linked Printer is connected: “Link Basic
Screen” ←→ “Master Making/Print Basic Screen”
• When the optional Document Storage Card or USB
Flash Drive is attached: “Scan Basic
Screen”←→“Master Making/Print Basic Screen”
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] 157
REG-ML_EN.book Page 158 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
[Display]
Functions
Description
Start-Up Screen
Select an animation to display at Start-up.
Logo(RISO)/Logo(EZ)/Character
Metric/Inch Switch (For EZ591U only)
Change the format for displaying measurements to
metric or inches (imperial).
Inch/Metric
Display Adjustment
Change background color (colour), density and
brightness of the Touch Screen. When the “ECO
mode” is set to “ON”, the background brightness of the
Touch Screen is locked to “-2”.
Background: White/Blue
Display Density
-5, -4 ... -1, 0, +1 ... +4, +5
Backlight Lightness:
-2, -1, 0, +1, +2
Job list display
Change the file name display of the stored data in
Storage Selection Screen, Job List Screen and USB
Job List Screen.
From top, From bottom
Displayed Language
Select the language displayed on the screen.
#01, #02, #03 ...
Important!:
• Contact your dealer (or authorized service
representative) to change the settings.
158 Changing Default Settings [Admin.]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 159 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
Functions
Description
Image Processing
Change the default setting for the “image processing
mode”.
• Line
• Photo (Standard, Portrait,
Group)
• Duo (Line, Photo/Shadow off)
• Pencil (Darker, Lighter)
Scanning Contrast
• Contrast Range:
Change the default setting for the “scanning contrast”.
Lighter/Standard/Darker
• Contrast:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Auto
[Default]
Reproduction Size
Change the default setting for the “size”.
100%, Auto
Print Speed
Change the default setting for the “print speed”.
When the “ECO mode” is set to “ON”, the initial setting
cannot be changed.
1, 2, 3 ,4 ,5
Print Density
Change the default settings for the “print density”.
When the “ECO mode” is set to “ON”, the initial
settings cannot be changed.
• Print Density Level
Lighter, Standard, Darker
• Print Density
1, 2, 3 ,4 ,5
OP Auto Process *
Change the default setting for the “Auto Process” when
an ADF unit (Option) or Job Separator is installed.
ON, OFF
ADF Semi-Auto *
Change the default setting for the “ADF Semi-Auto”
when the ADF unit (Option) is installed.
ON, OFF
Auto Process Mode *
Change the default setting for the “Auto Process”.
ON, OFF
Job Separation *
Change the default setting for the “Job Separation”
when the Job Separator (option) is installed.
ON, OFF
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] 159
REG-ML_EN.book Page 160 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
Functions
Jump Wing Control
Change the default positioning of the Paper Jumping
Wing.
Description
ON, OFF
Important!:
• This option is available only when the special paper
setting is pre-configured. Contact your dealer (or
authorized service representative) to pre-configure
this setting.
[Default]
Paper Ejection Adj
Change the default settings for “Paper Ejection Adj.”.
)p.98
Separation Fan: OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
Suction Fan: 1, 2, 3, 4
Default Folder *
When the optional Document Storage Card is
attached, change the folder in which to save the data
scanned in the scan mode and the folder to save the
data sent from the computer.
• Scan Data Folder:
1-6 folder (Factory default:
1_folder)
• PC Job Folder:
1-6 folder (Factory default:
1_folder)
Custom Paper Entry
Specify paper dimensions before using non-standard
sized paper.
)p.170
Fixed Scan Size
Scan the original at the specified standard size
regardless of the set original size.
For EZ591:
OFF, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
LetterR, Statement, Statement R
For EZ571/EZ531:
OFF, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
Foolscap
Folder Renaming *
When the optional Document Storage Card is
attached, changes the folder name of the folder used
to save data.
1-6 folder
[System]
Internal CI, External CI
CI Select
Choose between “Internal CI” and “External CI” settings.
160 Changing Default Settings [Admin.]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 161 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
Functions
Description
External CI Info *
• When using a DHCP server
If the machine is equipped with the optional IS300, set
[Use DHCP]
the IP address to connect the machine to the network. • When entering IP address
IP address settings differ depending on the type of network.
manually
[Manual Input]
Note:
or the Print Quantity
• To change an input source, touch the applicable
Keys.
box, or press the
key to rotate options.
• If the message “Network Communication is Not
Possible” is displayed when touching [External CI
Info], touch [Cancel] and wait for the IS300 to finish
starting up, then try again.
Base IP Address
Set the IP address for connecting the machine to a network.
IP address settings differ depending on the type of network.
Note:
[System]
• To change an input source, touch the applicable
box, or press the
key to rotate options.
• If the message “Starting Up Network Card” is
displayed when touching [Base IP Address], touch
[Cancel] and wait for the RISO Network Card
(Option) to finish starting up (approx. 1 minute), then
try again.
90 to 99 %
Margin-Plus Rate
Specify default size-reduction rate for the “Margin+” setting. (Factory default is 94%)
Clock/Calendar
Set the internal clock of the machine.
The time/date displays on the
Info screen.
)p.207
Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute
(Day/Month/Year Hour:Minute)
Multi-Up Interval
Select the interval time (seconds) between first and
second scans when using Multi-Up Printing.
15s/30s
Reserve Period
Select a duration of time (seconds) for the inactive
machine to receive data from a computer but restricts
processing any output command.
OFF/15s/30s/60s
Ex. Reserve Period
When “Reserve Period” is set, extends the Reserve
Period (minutes) to prevent data interruption.
5mn/10mn/30mn
Auto Clear
Select whether to reset all settings to default
automatically when the machine is inactive for a set
period (minutes).
• Auto Clear
OFF/ON
• Waiting Time
1-60 mn (factory default is 5
mn)
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] 161
REG-ML_EN.book Page 162 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
Functions
Description
Energy Saving Mode
Select to activate Sleep Mode or Shutdown Power
when the machine is inactive for a set period of time.
• Energy Saving Mode
OFF/Auto Sleep/Auto PowerOFF
• Waiting Time
1-60 mn (factory default is 5
mn)
• OFF
“Energy Saving Mode” is not activated. Power is
turned ON/OFF using the power switch.
• Auto Sleep
The machine is standing by to receive data from the
computer, but the rest of its functions are powered
off.
• Auto Power-OFF
Automatically shuts the power off. (Data cannot be
received.)
[System]
Power-OFF Schedule
Set a time of the day to automatically shut power to the
machine off.
If the machine is in use, or receiving data, power will
not shut off.
• Power-OFF Schedule
OFF/ON
• Shut-Off time
Hour: Minute
ECO mode
This mode makes the printing pressure and the LCD
touch panel brightness lower than those in the normal
printing mode, thus reducing power consumption in
printing. When “ON” is selected, the default values for
the “print speed” and the “print density” cannot be
changed.
When this machine is in the ECO mode, the “ ECO
mode” icon appears.
ON, OFF
Note:
• When both the “ECO” and “Ink Saving” modes are
selected, the “ Ink Saving” icon appears.
User Management
Set the User Management function.
)p.106
• Management Level
Set the “Management Level”.
• Create User
Register the administrator and users of this
machine.
• Rename Group
Change the group name.
• Reset Counter
Reset all user counters for master-making/printing.
• Recognized by
Set the Recognition and Identification System.
Protect
Determine the “Protect” setting.
162 Changing Default Settings [Admin.]
OFF, ON
)p.173
REG-ML_EN.book Page 163 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
Functions
Description
Auto Idling
Select whether to perform “Auto Idling” when making a
master after a set period of non-use.
Also selects a period of non-use before initiating “Auto
Idling”, as well as the number of idle rotations.
• Auto Idling
OFF/ON
• Non-Use Time
1-12 hour
• Rotation
1-3 (times)
Auto Page Renewal
Allows you to set when to recreate a new master. Once
the specified number of copies is reached, the master in
use is automatically discarded and a new one created.
You can also specify the number of proof copies to
make after recreating the master.
• Auto Page Renewal
OFF, ON
Minimum Print Q’ty
Set minimum number of copies to print.
This prevents master from being made when a smaller
quantity is entered for printing.
• Auto Renewal Point
1-9999 copies (Factory default
is 1000 copies)
• Sample Copy Output
0-99 copies (Factory default is
3 copies)
OFF/ON (2-99 copies)
Important!:
• This setting can be locked to prevent alteration.
Consult your dealer (or authorized service
representative) for details.
[System]
• Purchase Qty
0-99 Pcs.
• Remaining Qty to be notified
0-99 Pcs.
Stock Management
In order to check current stock quantity, insert the
number of consumables purchased.
Note:
• When stock quantity falls below the “Remaining Qty
to be notified”, a message will appear on the display.
• This setting is disabled by factory default.
Consult your dealer (or authorized service
representative) for details.
Initialize Network *
Initialize the network setting and return to the factory
setting when the RISO Network Card (Option) is
installed.
See RISO Network Card User's
Guide for details.
Beep Sound
Select whether to activate a beep sound when a key/
button is pressed, or when an error occurs.
OFF/Limited/ON
• ON
Beeps when any key/button is pressed. Beeps when
an event is caused/completed.
• Limited
Does not beep when keys/buttons are pressed.
Does not beep when restarting the machine.
• OFF
Does not beep.
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] 163
REG-ML_EN.book Page 164 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Display Access
Button
Functions
Description
Link Properties
)p.193
Linked Printer
If only one Linked Printer is attached to the machine
(there are no other Linked Printers or networked
computers), it is “One-to-One”.
PC Network, One-to-One
Link-Free Volume
Set a number of copies by which the output device is
determined. When print quantity does not reach the set
value, the job is to be output from a Linked Printer.
When printing more copies than Link-Free Volume, the
machine will perform printing.
ON [Link-Free Volume]
2-99 copies/OFF
(Factory default is 20 copies)
Note:
[Link Mode]
Only displayed when
a Linked Printer is
connected.
• This function is not available for EZ591.
• The default value is 20 copies.
• “Minimum Print Q’ty” cannot be set when “Link-Free
Volume” is ON.
Duplex Interval
Select the interval time (seconds) between first and
second scans when using Double-sided Printing.
15 seconds/30 seconds
Online Auto-Link
Select whether to automatically output a job from the
Linked Printer when print quantity is less than LinkFree Volume.
OFF/ON
Note:
• This function is not available for EZ591.
• When “Link-Free Volume” is OFF, this item is
grayed out and not available.
Link Info Refresh
Set how frequently the machine receives data from a
Linked Printer.
10-999 seconds
(Factory Default is 15 seconds)
Link Scanning Mode
You can select “Speed-based” or “Image-based” when
outputting from a connected machine.
Speed-based, Image-based
Print Colors (Colours)
See RISO Editor User’s Guide for
details.
Tool Bar Position
[Editor]
Sub Tool Bar
Page Orientation
164 Changing Default Settings [Admin.]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 165 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Customizing the Default Settings
The default settings can be changed when the machine is not in operation.
Make sure there is no pending or current Print Job operation.
Note:
• If the administrator is registered in User Management, only the administrator can change the [Admin.] settings.
(This operation requires input of the administrator's PIN code or connection of the registered USB Flash Drive.)
See )p.106
• On the Admin. screen, the current setting is displayed on the right side of each button.
1
Touch [Admin.] on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
Basic
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
“PIN code”
Input the administrator’s PIN code using the
Print Quantity Keys and touch [OK].
Ready to Make Master
Page(A4)
‹ When “Recognized by” is set to
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
A4
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Input the PIN code
OK
Touch [OK].
Ready to Make Master
‹ When “Recognized by” is set to
“USB Flash Drive”
Connect the administrator’s registered USB
Flash Drive to the USB slot.
Insert the registered
USB flash drive
Note:
• When an administrator is registered in User
Management, the Recognition Screen is displayed.
Operate the screen to log in as the administrator. If already identified as the administrator, the
Recognition Screen will not be displayed.
Users other than administrator are prohibited.
The Admin. screen is displayed once access
has been identified.
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] 165
REG-ML_EN.book Page 166 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
3
Select a function to modify.
‹ Additional Setup Screen Available
Button Style
Choosing a button makes it the default.
Admin.
All
DirectAccess Entry
Display
Selections Entry
Default
Display Priority
Mode Screen
System
Mode Key Pattern
Mode Select.
Link Mode
Start-Up Screen
Image Type
Editor
Logo(EZ)
P .1/9
Standard
Portrait
Group
Display Access Buttons
Display Access Buttons allow for quick selection
of desired functions by displaying only relevant
groups of function buttons.
[All]: All Functions
[Display]: Functions related to Screen Display
[Default]: Basic Operational Functions
[System]: Functions affecting the entire System
[Link Mode]: Functions related to Linked Printer
[Editor]: Functions related to Editor
‹ Additional Setup Screen Available
Numeric Value Style
Touch
to increase/decrease value.
Numbers may be entered using the Print
Quantity Keys.
• [Link Mode] is only displayed when a Linked
Printer is connected.
4
Change settings.
Some functions have their own Setup screens,
some don't. There are several styles for setting
values. Following samples demonstrate different
value setting styles.
‹ No additional Setup Screen
(2 or more options to choose from)
Touch the function name button to change the
value displayed to the right.
Admin.
All
DirectAccess Entry
Display
Selections Entry
Default
Display Priority
Mode Screen
System
Mode Key Pattern
Mode Select.
Link Mode
Start-Up Screen
Editor
‹ Additional Setup Screen Available
Multi Level Entry Style
Select a button, then set its values either by
touching more buttons or entering a value
numerically.
Logo(EZ)
P .1/9
Once the settings have been changed, continue on to step 6.
The following screen appears.
166 Changing Default Settings [Admin.]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 167 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ Additional Setup Screen Available
Data Specification Type
A screen to specify the stored data displays.
See )p.183 for details on specifying the data.
Storage Selection
1_folder
Touch [ON] to display more options on the right.
‹ Additional Setup Screen Available
Text Input Type
Input the name after touching the button of the
name to change.
Touch the button and the Rename screen
appears.
Free Area:
Nov25,11
Fax-cover.doc
Nov25,11
Newsletter.doc
Nov25,11
Images.doc
Nov25,11
ID Print Job
Cancel
USB Job List
Touch [OK].
Base IP Address
Folder Renaming
98
NewsLetter.doc
View edit
5
Close
Cancel
OK
OK
Manual Input
Use DHCP
1 folder
2 folder
3 folder
4 folder
5 folder
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
6 folder
Skip to step 6 if there is no additional setup
screen.
Note:
Rename
Cancel
• Touch [Cancel] to cancel the changes and
return to the Admin. screen.
• The selected value is displayed to the right of
the button (for most functions).
OK
1_ folder
Small
Capital
6
Touch
.
Returns to the original Basic Screen.
Touch the character buttons to enter text.
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small]
or [Capital] button.
)p.130
Changing Default Settings [Admin.] 167
REG-ML_EN.book Page 168 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Setting Up Direct Access Area and
Selections Tab
[Direct Access Entry] [Selections Entry]
Frequently-accessed functions for each mode can be placed on “Direct Access” area in the Basic Screen, or on
“Selections” screen.
This allows quick changes and direct access to each function's Setup screens, eliminating the need to search from
a long list of functions.
Each mode (Master Making/Print/Scanning/Link) is capable of storing its own unique settings.
Basic Screen
Master Make
Print
Scanning
Link
Direct Access
4
4
4
4
Selections
9
9
-
6
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Ready to Make Master
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Selections
Reservation
Black
Direct Access Area
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idl e
In fo
Functions
Job Memory
Book
Shadow
Confidential
Program
Idling
Action
Sorter
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Basic
Admin.
Selections Screen
Note:
• Choose functions that are relevant to each mode.
• The machine comes with factory default “Direct Access” area and “Selections” screen entries, which can be
changed.
• Any functions available in the “Functions” screen can be selected.
• When there are multiple Linked Printers, select a device first, then make changes in the “Admin.” tab to select/modify “Direct Access” area and “Selections” screen.
• Optional attachment is automatically added to the “Direct Access” area and “Selections” tab if a space is available
for another button.
(Optional devices to a Linked Printer must be entered on the Admin. screen.)
• When the Management Level is set to “High/Full Management”, each user can set the functions displayed in the
Direct Access Area (My Direct Access). See, )p.155.
168 Setting Up Direct Access Area and Selections Tab [Direct Access Entry] [Selections Entry]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 169 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
In the following steps, the registration on DirectAccess Entry and Selections Entry are explained at the same time.
1
Touch [DirectAccess Entry] or
[Selections Entry] on the Admin.
screen.
4
Select a function to assign.
Function List
Cancel
OK
No Entry
Admin.
DirectAccess Entry
Idling Action
Renew Page
Display
Selections Entry
Confidential
Auto Page Renewal
Default
Display Priority
Mode Screen
Ink Saving
Job Separation
System
Mode Key Pattern
Mode Select.
Link Mode
Start-Up Screen
P . 3/4
Logo(EZ)
P .1/11
Note:
• Touch
or
to display more functions if necessary.
• To remove a function that is accidentally
assigned, touch [No Entry].
• Functions already assigned are grayed-out and
are not available.
• Some functions display only when optional
devices are installed.
Select a mode tab to store new buttons.
DirectAccess Entry
MasterMake
3
Interval
All
Editor
2
Editor
Printing
Cancel
OK
Scanning
Frame1
Frame2
Frame3
Frame4
No Entry
No Entry
No Entry
No Entry
5
Touch [OK].
6
Touch [OK].
7
Touch
Select a button to assign a function.
DirectAccess Entry
MasterMake
Printing
Cancel
OK
Scanning
Frame1
Frame2
Frame3
Frame4
No Entry
No Entry
No Entry
No Entry
Returns to DirectAccess Entry screen or Selections Entry screen. The selected functions are
added.
To add more functions, or to replace a button with
another function, repeat steps 2 to 5.
Returns to the Admin. screen. “Direct Access”
area or “Selections” screen is updated.
.
Returns to the Master Making Basic Screen or
Print Basic Screen.
If the button has a function already assigned to it, the newly
selected function will overwrite the previous function.
Setting Up Direct Access Area and Selections Tab [Direct Access Entry] [Selections Entry] 169
REG-ML_EN.book Page 170 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Registering a Custom Paper Size
[Custom Paper Entry]
Non-standard paper sizes must be pre-entered into memory. Once a paper size is stored into memory, it can be
retrieved with the [Paper] button.
Up to 30 different sizes may be entered. Previously stored sizes can be modified or deleted.
Important!:
• Custom paper sizes must be entered. Failure to do so may result in incorrect scanning.
Entering sizes and changing names
1
Touch [Admin.] on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
3
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
All
DirectAccess Entry
Display
Selections Entry
Default
Display Priority
Mode Screen
Mode Select.
A4
Reservation
Black
2
Touch [System] or
to display
[Custom Paper Entry] on the screen.
System
Mode Key Pattern
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Link Mode
Start-Up Screen
Id l e
In fo
Editor
Touch [OK].
4
Logo(EZ)
P .1/9
Touch [Custom Paper Entry].
Ready to Make Master
Admin.
All
Custom Paper Entry
Display
Fixed Scan Size
Default
Folder Renaming
System
CI Select
Link Mode
Base IP Address
Editor
If the Recognition Screen is displayed, follow the
message on the screen. See step 2 in “Customizing the Default Settings”. ()p.165)
170 Registering a Custom Paper Size [Custom Paper Entry]
OFF
Internal CI
P .1 / 4
REG-ML_EN.book Page 171 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
5
11 Touch [OK] when done.
Touch an unused button.
Note:
Custom Paper Entry
• To change a name, repeat from step 8.
Close
Select a Register Frame for a Button
Register
U-1
No Entry
Change
U-2
No Entry
U-3
No Entry
U-4
No Entry
U-5
No Entry
Rename
Clear
Confirm the name and touch
12 [Close].
Returns to the Admin. screen. Paper size is
updated.
Tip:
Printing on Extended Paper
The machine can print on paper 436 mm-555 mm
(175/32"-2127/32") long by storing the size as a custom-size.
)p.170
When entering a size longer than 436 mm (175/32")
on the Custom Paper Entry screen, the paper will
be treated as “Extended Paper”.
When “Extended Paper” is selected on the Paper
Size screen, the machine switches into “Extended
Paper” mode.
Unused buttons are displayed with a solid line.
Used buttons are grayed-out and are not available.
6
Enter the paper size.
Custom Paper Entry
Close
S e l e c tSai zRee gEi snt et rr yF r a m e f oCancel
r a Button
U-1
Register
Feed
Retrieve
Rename
Important!:
OK
• Some Extended Paper may fail to pass through
the machine due to its paper characteristics, or
may get smudged with ink due to its image positioning. Consult your dealer (or authorized service representative) for advice.
W
100 mm
(100-340)
H
Clear
148 mm
(148-555)
“Extended Paper” Mode
(Numeric keypad is
available for input)
Facing towards the paper feeding direction (into
Paper Feed Tray), enter W (width) and H (height).
Touch either
, or use Print Quantity Keys.
7
Touch [OK].
Rename as necessary.
Touch [Close] to skip renaming the size.
8 Touch [Rename].
9 Select a button to rename.
Touch the character buttons to
10 enter
a new name.
Change capitalization by selecting the [Small] or
[Capital] button.
)p.130
• When the machine is on “Extended Paper”
mode, it is indicated in the message area as
either “Ready to Make Master <Ext.Paper>” or
“Ready to Print <Ext.Paper>”.
• On “Extended Paper” mode, the machine can
print papers measuring 436 mm-555 mm (175/32"2127/32") lengthwise from top to bottom facing the
paper feed direction. However, maximum printing
area and top/bottom Print Positioning range
remains as usual.
)p.18
)p.94
• Print timing and speed is different on “Extended
Paper” mode in comparison to normal printing.
This is to be expected, so do not be alarmed.
• Contact your dealer (or authorized service representative) for suggestions about placing
paper on the Paper Feed Tray and the Paper
Receiving Tray when on “Extended Paper”
mode.
Note:
• To clear the current name, touch
press the
key.
button or
Registering a Custom Paper Size [Custom Paper Entry] 171
REG-ML_EN.book Page 172 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Deleting a Custom Paper Size
1
Touch [Custom Paper Entry] on the
Admin. screen.
4
Touch [OK].
Custom Paper Entry
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
Admin.
Register
CardA
All
Custom Paper Entry
Display
Fixed Scan Size
Default
Folder Renaming
System
CI Select
Link Mode
Base IP Address
This Setting
Retrieve
will be
Cleared
OK?
Rename
OFF
Clear
Editor
Internal CI
Cancel
OK
P .1 / 4
Returns to the Custom Paper Entry screen. The
selected paper size is cleared.
2
Touch [Clear].
5
Custom Paper Entry
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
CardA
Change
U-2
No Entry
U-3
No Entry
U-4
No Entry
U-5
No Entry
Rename
Clear
3
W200 H300 mm
Register
Select the paper size to clear.
Custom Paper Entry
Close
Select a Button to be Cleared
W200 H300 mm
Register
CardA
Change
U-2
No Entry
U-3
No Entry
U-4
No Entry
U-5
No Entry
Rename
Clear
172 Registering a Custom Paper Size [Custom Paper Entry]
Touch [Close].
Returns to the Admin. screen. Paper size is
updated.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 173 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Keeping Masters Secure After Printing
[Protect]
After printing is completed, the master remains on the Print Drum (Cylinder). To protect confidential documents from
unauthorized duplication, use the Confidential feature to discard the master after printing. (i.e. “Confidential” function)
Used masters are held in the Master Disposal Box. The machine is equipped with a protection function to prevent the
master from being removed from the Master Disposal Box and leaked by any ill-intended third party.
“Protect” Setting
When the “Protect” setting is ON:
• When printing is complete, the “Confidential” function is activated to show the message to discard the master
remaining on the Print Drum (Cylinder).
• The Master Disposal Box is locked and cannot be removed while the machine is standby. (However, the Master
Disposal Box can be unlocked and removed if the master jams in the Disposal Unit or if the Master Disposal Box
becomes full.)
Locking the Master Disposal Box
To prevent any leak of master documents after printing, the Master Disposal Box can be locked with a padlock so that
no-one apart from the administrator of the machine can remove it. (Purchase an ordinary padlock whose loop will fit
through the hole, which is 7 mm (1/4") wide.)
Status of Protect functions and restrictions
Status of [Protect] functions
Restrictions
Protect: OFF
Padlock: No
No restrictions on printer access *1
Protect: ON
Padlock: No
“Confidential” message is displayed
Master Disposal Box is locked *2
Protect: OFF
Padlock: Locked
No “Confidential” message is displayed
Nobody but the administrator can dispose of the master.
Protect: ON
Padlock: Locked
“Confidential” message is displayed
Nobody but the administrator can dispose of the master.
*1 The ordinary “Confidential” function is available.
*2 The lock is released if a master jams in the Disposal Unit or if the Master Disposal Box becomes full.
Keeping Masters Secure After Printing [Protect] 173
REG-ML_EN.book Page 174 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
Preventing Leaks of Masters After Creation or Disposal [Protect]
Turning the Protect Setting ON
1
Touch [Admin.] on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
Basic
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
All
Auto Clear
5mn
Display
Energy Saving Mode
1mn
Default
Power-OFF Schedule
OFF
System
User Management
Link Mode
Protect
A4
Reservation
Black
2
Touch [Protect].
Admin.
Ready to Make Master
Page(A4)
3
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Editor
ON
P .3/4
“Protect” is turned ON.
Touch [OK].
Ready to Make Master
If the Recognition Screen is displayed, follow the
message on the screen. See step 2 in “Customizing the Default Settings”. ()p.165)
174 Keeping Masters Secure After Printing [Protect]
Note:
• If “Protect” is ON, “Energy Saving Mode” (Auto
Sleep) is activated automatically.
• If “Protect” is ON, [Renew Page] is grayed-out
and is not available.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 175 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Advanced Features
‹ If “Protect” is ON:
The following screen is displayed after printing.
Cancel the “Protect” setting
Only the administrator can cancel the “Protect” setting.
1
F95-008
-- Protect --
Touch [Admin.] on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
Discard Current Master
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
OK
Cancel
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Touch [OK] or [Cancel].
[OK]: Discards the master remaining on the
Print Drum (Cylinder).
[Cancel]: Choose this when you do not wish to
discard the master or wish to print further copies.
Note:
Multi-Up
Print
D-Feed
Check
Black
2
READY
Id le
Info
Touch [OK].
Ready to Make Master
• The “-- Protect -- Discard Current Master” message is also displayed when printing from computer data on a PC.
• If you select [Cancel] while the “Protect” setting
is active, the “-- Protect -- Discard Current Master” message appears each time you press the
key or the
key.
• The screen shows the message below when:
– setting the Print Drum (Cylinder) that has
been removed without the “Confidential”
operation, or
– the machine goes into the sleep mode after a
certain period of time has passed after the
confirmation message was displayed, and
then the sleep mode is canceled (or the
power is turned ON).
A4
If the Recognition Screen is displayed, follow the
message on the screen. See step 2 in “Customizing the Default Settings”. ()p.165)
3
Touch [Protect].
F94-007
-- Protect -Discard Current Master
OK
Touch [OK] to discard the master remaining on
the Print Drum (Cylinder).
After “Please Wait a Moment” is displayed, the
“Protect” setting is canceled.
Keeping Masters Secure After Printing [Protect] 175
REG-ML_EN.book Page 176 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use
Method
The machine can store original data. (To use this function, an optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash Drive
is required.)
Stored original data can be repeatedly retrieved for printing.
There are two methods of storing original data: “Storage Memory” and “USB Flash Drive”. “Storage Memory” allows
you to store original data on the internal optional Document Storage Card of the printing machine. “USB Flash Drive”
allows you to store original data in a USB Flash Drive. Both methods can store original data as follows.
• Storing data from a hard-copy original after scanning from the scanner of the printer.
• Storing original data created on a computer.
The methods of storing data from a hard-copy original and printing the stored original data are explained here.
Details on how to store the data created on a computer, see the “RISO Printer Driver User’s Guide (CD-ROM)”.
Store
Retrieve and print
Originals scanned in
scan mode
Document
Storage Card
Original data sent from
a computer
Original data
retrieval
(Storage Memory)
Original data storage
(Storage Memory)
Document Storage Card
Document Storage Card
USB Flash Drive
Stored original data
created on a computer.
USB Flash Drive
USB Flash Drive
Stored original data
scanned in scan mode
USB Flash Drive
PC
Original data
retrieval
176
REG-ML_EN.book Page 177 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
• The following operations are available with data stored in “Storage Memory” or “USB Flash Drive”.
– Stored original data can be repeatedly retrieved for printing.
– If the storage data contains multiple pages, you can choose to output only odd or even pages, or indicate the
specific pages to print using “Output”.
)p.186
– The storage data also can be overlaid onto a hard-copy original and printed.
)p.187
• All users of this machine can use the 6 folders in “Storage Memory”. It is convenient to store and use the data in
common with others.
• 6 folders are created in each “USB Flash Drive”. Use the folders as needed, such as when selecting a folder for
storing any specified data.
Important!:
• We cannot guarantee storage data or USB Flash Drive data against loss caused by accidents or unforeseen
events. We recommend that you use your computer to make back-up copies of any important documents.
Note:
• You can easily delete unnecessary stored data when remaining free area of the optional Document Storage Card
or USB Flash Drive is limited. The free area is displayed in the Storage Selection screen or USB Job List screen.
)p.186
• As to the folder for storing original data, 6 folders are prepared for the optional Document Storage Card and 6 folders are prepared for each memory in the case of USB Flash Drives. When you use folders to share data, you are
recommended to devise folder rules (e.g. dividing the folders by department or type of data)
• Folder names of the optional Document Storage Card can be changed on the Admin. screen.
)p.160
• To change folder names of the USB Flash Drives, use the “RISO Utility Software” (RISO USB PRINT MANAGER)
included on the provided software CD-ROM. (If you change folder names by Explorer, they will not be recognized
by the machine.)
“RISO Utility Software User's Guide” (CD-ROM)
• You can change the order of the storage data and USB Flash Drive data.
)p.185
177
REG-ML_EN.book Page 178 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data
(Scan Mode)
Scan mode is a function that allows you to scan a hard-copy original with the machine's scanner to save as storage
data or USB Flash Drive data.
You can repeatedly retrieve and print previously scanned and stored original data. This saves you the trouble of
rescanning documents when repeatedly printing the same materials.
)p.183
This function also prevents documents from getting lost or damaged over time.
Important!:
• The storage function is not available in the machine equipped with the optional RISO IS300 controller. The data
scanned in the Scan Mode is stored in the IS300.
Note:
• Delete unnecessary stored data when remaining free area of the optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash
Drive is limited.
)p.186
The following functions can be used in scan mode: See the explanation of each function for more details.
• Image ()p.56)
• Contrast ()p.58)
• Size (enlargement/reduction) ()p.59)
• Dot Process ()p.65)
• Contrast Adj ()p.66)
The following functions are specific to scan mode.
•
•
•
•
•
Tone Curve ()p.67)
My Direct Access ()p.155)
2 Up/Multi-Up Print ()p.69)
Book Shadow ()p.81)
Preview ()p.87)
• Format ()p.182)
Scanning an Original
1
2
Place the original.
See step 4 in “Printing from a Paper Document or
Book” ()p.40).
Ready to Scan Data
Page No.1
Select a scan mode.
See )p.24 for information about selecting a scan
mode.
After selecting the Scan mode and if the following
“Page Size” screen is displayed, select the page
size (original size) and touch [OK].
File Name
scan_0001
Owner
Directory
1_folder
Owner-1
Basic
Page(A4)
Admin.
Size
Format
Auto
A4
Auto
Line
Preview
3
178 Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode)
Functions
Contrast
Dot
Process
Book
Shadow
Setting data information.
Sets the file name, directory and owner name.
)p.180
REG-ML_EN.book Page 179 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
4
Setting required functions.
Set the required functions for scanning the original.
Note:
• You can check scanned data instantly by enabling the “Preview” function. You can also use
this function to check data before saving.
)p.87
• See )p.178 for the functions that can be set.
Important!:
• Set “Format” when scanning custom-sized originals.
)p.182
5
Press the
key.
The scan starts.
Note:
• After scanning the original, a preview shows on
the display if “Preview” is set.
6
Repeat steps 1, 4 and 5 if the original
has multiple pages.
Note:
• If multiple originals were placed on the ADF unit
(Option), all originals will be scanned at the
same settings.
7
Touch
8
Touch [Yes].
.
Once the original to be saved as one set of data is
scanned, touch
.
A confirmation screen appears.
The data is saved.
Note:
• Press the
key to exit scan mode.
Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode) 179
REG-ML_EN.book Page 180 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Setting Data Information
Settings for the data to be scanned and stored are configured on the Scan Basic Screen.
The file name, directory and owner name are automatically allocated when scan mode is started, but you can change
this preset information if needed.
Note:
• Default settings for the “Directory” folder can be changed in “Admin.”.
()p.160)
1
2
Enter a file name.
1) Touch the file name input box.
Ready to Scan Data
File Name
scan_0001
Owner
Directory
1_folder
Owner-1
Basic
Functions
Contrast
Admin.
Size
When saving in the USB Flash Drive, connect the
USB Flash Drive to the USB slot in advance.
Note:
Page No.1
Page(A4)
Specifying a Directory.
• If the machine is equipped with the optional
RISO Controller IS300, you cannot specify
where to store the data.
1) Touch the directly input box.
Format
Auto
A3
Auto
Line
Ready to Scan Data
Page No.1
Preview
Dot
Process
Book
Shadow
The Rename screen appears.
2) Touch the
File Name
Report
Owner
Directory
1_folder
Owner-1
Basic
button to delete the current
Page(A4)
Functions
Contrast
name.
Admin.
Size
Format
Auto
A3
Auto
Line
Rename
Cancel
OK
Preview
Dot
Process
Book
Shadow
scan_0001
Small
The Directory screen appears.
Capital
2) Touch [Storage Memory] or [USB Flash
Drive].
Directory
Note:
• You can also press the
delete.
4)
Storage Memory
1 folder
USB Flash Drive
2 folder
one character at a time.
Touch the Text Type button to change the
display, and look for the text you want to
enter. )p.130
Touch [OK].
The file name is confirmed and the screen
returns to the Scan Basic Screen.
180 Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode)
OK
3 folder
key to
3) Touch the text button and enter the file name
Cancel
4 folder
ID Print
5 folder
Non-ID Print
6 folder
Free Area:
If the USB Flash Drive is not connected,
[USB Flash Drive] is grayed-out and is not
available.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 181 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
3) Touch [ID Print] or [Non-ID Print].
4)
5)
[ID Print] and [Non-ID Print] are displayed
only when “Management Level” is set to
“High/Full Management”.
Touch the folder to save the data.
Touch [OK].
The “Directory” folder is confirmed and the
screen returns to the Scan Basic Screen.
Tip:
Changing the Owner Name
1) Touch [Rename] on the Owner screen.
Ready to Scan Data
Page ONo.2
wner
Note:
• The folder name of the “Directory” folder of
storage data can be changed in “Admin.”.
()p.160)
3
Owner-6 Admin.
2)
Report
Owner
Directory
2_folder
Owner-1
Functions
3)
4)
Size
Size
Owner-3
Owner-4
Dot
Process
Format
Owner-7
Auto
Owner-8 A4
Book
Shadow
Touch the button of the owner to rename.
The Rename screen appears.
Touch the
button to delete the current
name.
Enter the Owner name.
Touch [OK].
Rename
Format
Auto
A3
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Cancel
OK
RISO-2
Small
2)
Owner
Admin.
Contrast
Preview
Contrast
Auto
Preview
File Name
Basic
RenameFunctionsOwner-2
Basic
Line
Page No.1
Page(A4)
Owner-5
Owner-1
Page (A3)
Specifying an Owner.
1) Touch the owner input box.
Ready to Scan Data
Close
:scan_0001
File Name
Specify
Owner-1
:
Directory
Capital
Book
Shadow
The Owner screen appears.
Touch the button of the owner to set.
Ready to Scan Data
PageONo.2
wner
Close
:scan_0001
File Name
Specify
Owner-1
:
Directory
Owner-5
Owner-1
RenameFunctionsOwner-2
Basic
Owner-6 Admin.
Page (A3)
Contrast
Size
Owner-3
Auto
Line
Preview
Owner
Owner-4
Dot
Process
The owner name is confirmed and the screen
returns to the Owner screen.
Format
Owner-7
Auto
Owner-8 A4
Book
Shadow
The owner name is confirmed and the screen
returns to the Scan Basic Screen.
Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode) 181
REG-ML_EN.book Page 182 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Specifying Stored Size
Specify the size at which to save the scanned original.
It is necessary to set the Format size when:
• you place the originals on the glass platen
• you set the custom-sized originals in the ADF unit (Option)
• you want to save at a size that differs from the size of the original
When the standard-sized original is set in the optional ADF unit, the original size is detected automatically. The original is saved by original format.
1
Touch [Format] on the Scan Basic
Screen.
Ready to Scan Data
Page No.1
File Name
Report
Owner
Directory
2_folder
Owner-2
Basic
Functions
Page (A4)
Admin.
Contrast
Size
Format
Auto
A4
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
Preview
Book
Shadow
The Format screen appears.
2
Touch the Format size button to be
set.
Ready to Scan Data
PageFNo.2
ormat
Directory
Basic
Cancel
OK
:scan_0001
File Name
:
Auto
A3
Page (A3)
A4
Functions
B5
A4
Contrast
B4
Owner
A5
Size
B5
Auto
Admin.
Format
A5
Line
Owner-1
Auto
A4
P.
Preview
Dot
Process
Book
Shadow
If you select [Auto], the same size as the original
will automatically be set.
3
Touch [OK].
The stored size is confirmed and the screen
returns to the Scan Basic Screen.
182 Converting Hard-copies into Stored Data (Scan Mode)
REG-ML_EN.book Page 183 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Retrieving Stored Data and Printing
[Storage Memory][USB Job List]
Retrieving and printing stored data.
Retrieving Stored Data
When retrieving the USB Flash Drive data, connect the USB Flash Drive to the USB slot in advance. For details on
how to print USB Flash Drive data, see )p.44 “Printing from a Computer Data”.
Note:
• When “User Management” is set up by the administrator, the users will be asked to identify themselves during
operations. For details, refer to )p.43.
• When “Recognized by” is set to “PIN code” in User Management and the USB Flash Drive is connected while the
Basic Screen for each mode is displayed, the USB Job List screen is automatically displayed. See step 2.
1
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
3
Select [ID Print Job] or [Non-ID
Print].
Note:
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
‹ When retrieving data set with “ID
Print Job”
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
• When “Management Level” is set to “Low/
Admin tab only” in User Management, [ID Print
Job] will not be displayed.
Reservation
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Touch [ID Print Job].
Storage Selection
1_folder
2
Touch [Storage Memory] or [USB
Job List].
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Free Area:
98
NewsLetter.doc
30/09/11
Fax-cover.doc
30/09/11
Newsletter_P2.xls
30/09/11
Images.doc
30/09/11
View edit
Functions
Close
ID Print Job
USB Job List
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
P . 2/4
The Storage Selection screen or USB Job List
screen (with “Non-ID Print”) is displayed. (The “ID
Print Job” button is displayed on the screen.)
Retrieving Stored Data and Printing [Storage Memory][USB Job List] 183
REG-ML_EN.book Page 184 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
‹ When retrieving data set with “Non-
ID Print”
5
When “Non-ID Print” is displayed on the
screen, touch “Non-ID Print”.
Confirm the retrieved data.
Use the thumbnail to determine whether the
retrieved data is the data desired.
Storage Retrieve
Storage Selection
Free Area:
Close
98
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner:
Date&Time: 30/09/11
Format: A4
P.
19:04
Rotate
Copy/Move
Output
All Pages
Ascend
30/09/11
Clear
30/09/11
30/09/11
30/09/11
Color:Black
P.
View edit
4
Non-ID Print
USB Job List
6
Touch the data to print.
Storage Selection
Free Area:
From the Storage (USB Job List) Retrieve screen,
you can confirm retrieved data and specify output
settings.
See )p.186 for operational details.
Close
98
Touch [Retrieve].
The data is retrieved and Storage Mode Basic
Screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
P.
30/09/11
Basic
30/09/11
Selections
NewsLetter.doc
Owner: RISO
ReceiptTime: 30/09/11 19:04
Format: A4
30/09/11
30/09/11
Functions
P.1/4
Preview
Skip Page
Admin.
Paper
A4
Clear All
View edit
Non-ID Print
USB Job List
Process:
If you are selecting data stored in a different
folder, touch that folder's tab.
Black
Auto Process "OFF"
Idle
Job
Separation
Info
Note:
• If the stored data is not shown on the screen,
touch
or
to display.
• Touching [USB Job List] or [Storage Memory] displayed in the bottom right corner of the
screen switches to the Storage Selection
screen or USB Job List screen.
• For the data set with [ID Print], the following
icon appears.
: ID Print Job
7
Press the
key.
A master is made from the data.
After this, follow the same operations for paper
documents.
184 Retrieving Stored Data and Printing [Storage Memory][USB Job List]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 185 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Changing the Data Order
You can change the order of the stored data displayed on the Storage Selection screen/USB Job List screen.
Note:
• The factory setting is “Date Descend”.
1
3
Touch [View edit].
Note:
• [View edit] is inactive if there is no storage
data/USB Flash Drive data or only one stored
item.
Storage Selection
1_folder
2
Returns to the Storage Selection screen (USB Job
List screen).
Close
Free Area:
98
NewsLetter.doc
30/09/11
Fax-cover.doc
30/09/11
Newsletter_P2.xls
30/09/11
Images.doc
30/09/11
View edit
Touch [OK].
ID Print Job
USB Job List
On the Sorting screen, touch the button of the order you want.
Note:
• By using ON (inverted)/OFF of [File name
only], the dada display format can be switched
on the Storage (USB) Selection screen.
OFF: File Name + Owner Name + Date
ON (inverted): File Name
Retrieving Stored Data and Printing [Storage Memory][USB Job List] 185
REG-ML_EN.book Page 186 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Using the Storage Retrieve Screen/USB Job List Retrieve Screen
Each section of the Storage Retrieve screen/USB Job List Retrieve Screen is shown below.
An example of the Storage Retrieve screen is explained here.
Storage Retrieve
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner: RISO
Date&Time: 30/09/11
Format: A4
1
19:04
Rotate
Copy/Move
Output
:Al l Pages
Ascend
Clear
3
6
4
5
Color:Black
P. 1 /4
2
1) A thumbnail is displayed for each page.
2) If the data contains multiple pages, touch to
3)
4)
change page.
Touch to rotate the storage data 180 degrees
and output.
Output Range
If the storage data/USB Flash Drive data consists of
multiple pages, you can specify which pages to print.
Touch [Output] to display the Output screen.
Storage Retrieve
Output
Format: A4
Ascend
All Pages
Cancel
Touch [Clear] and a confirmation screen appears.
Touch [OK] to clear the data.
Storage Retrieve
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner:
Date&Time: 30/09/07
Format: A4
19:04
This data will be cleared
Copy/Move
OK?
:Al l Pages
Ascend
Retrieve
Owner:
Cancel
OK
Date&Time: 30/09/07 19:04
Descend
Copy/Move
Odd Pages
Specified Page Only
5) Clear
Even :Al
Pages
l Pages
Ascend
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P.
Touch the corresponding buttons to print all pages, only
odd pages, or only even pages. You can also specify
whether to print the selected pages in [Ascend] or
[Descend] order.
To specify a page range, touch the page input box and
touch either
or
to specify the pages.
Cancel
OK
P.
6) Copy/Move
Copy/Move the stored data between the Storage Memory and USB Flash Drive. From the Storage Retrieve
screen, copy/move data to the USB Flash Drive. From
the USB Job List retrieve screen, copy/move data to the
Storage Memory.
For details, see )p.189.
Copy/Move
USB Flash Drive
Cancel
1 usb_folder
2 usb_folder
3 usb_folder
4 usb_folder
Copy to
Move to
5 usb_folder
6 usb_folder
Free Area:
186 Retrieving Stored Data and Printing [Storage Memory][USB Job List]
OK
REG-ML_EN.book Page 187 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Overlaying Stored Data onto a Print Job [Overlay]
You can overlay stored data onto a hard-copy original.
For example, this function can be used to overlay a stamp over multiple originals indicating “Sample”.
Important!:
• To use this function, the optional Document Storage Card or USB Flash Drive is required.
• This function cannot be used with the following functions.
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
2
Ink Saving
Top Margin
Side Margin
Storage Memory (“Overlay” images cannot be stored.)
USB Job List (“Overlay” images cannot be stored.)
When sending original data from the computer
Place an original.
When overlaying data stored in the USB Flash
Drive, connect the USB Flash Drive to the USB
slot and touch [USB Job List].
Place the original on Glass Platen or in ADF unit
(Option).
See )p.37 for information on placing the original.
Storage Selection
Touch [Functions] on the Master
Making Basic Screen.
1_folder
Free Area:
98
NewsLetter.doc
30/09/11
Ready to Make Master
SAMPLE.doc
30/09/11
Newsletter_P2.xls
30/09/11
Basic
Images.doc
30/09/11
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Paper
View edit
Auto
ID Print Job
USB Job List
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
3
Close
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
USB Job List screen is displayed.
Id l e
In fo
Important!:
• Do not remove the USB Flash Drive until printing is finished.
Touch [Overlay].
4
Select the stored data to overlay.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Reservation
Storage Memory
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
Storage Selection
1_folder
Close
Free Area:
98
NewsLetter.doc
30/09/11
SAMPLE
30/09/11
Newsletter_P2.xls
30/09/11
Images.doc
30/09/11
P . 2/4
View edit
ID Print Job
USB Job List
The Storage Selection screen appears.
Overlaying Stored Data onto a Print Job [Overlay] 187
REG-ML_EN.book Page 188 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Details on how to select data, see steps 4 and 5 in
“Retrieving Stored Data and Printing” )p.183.
5
Check the stored data.
Check the thumbnail to make sure that the data is
the data you want to retrieve.
When there are several pages (editions), display
the data by touching or button.
Tip:
Overlaying Stored Data
The stored data overlays at the size it was saved. You cannot enlarge/reduce the size to match the original or paper
size.
Stored data
Original
Stored data
Original
Important!:
• Only one page of data can be retrieved for
Overlay.
6
Touch [Retrieve].
Storage Retrieve
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner: RISO
Date&Time: 30/09/11
SAMPLE
Format: A4
19:04
E
L
P
M
SA
P. 1/4
“Overlay” is set and the screen returns to the
Functions screen.
7
Make necessary operation to print.
For subsequent operations, see step 5 in “Printing
from a Paper Document or Book” ()p.40).
188 Overlaying Stored Data onto a Print Job [Overlay]
The stored data is overlaid after being centered at the
top of the original. You cannot adjust the overlay position.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 189 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Copying/Moving Stored Data
Data can be copied or moved between the Storage Memory and USB Flash Drive.
This is useful for performing backup or when the remaining free area of the Storage Memory or USB Flash Drive is
limited.
Note:
• It is not possible to copy/move data within the Storage Memory or USB Flash Drive.
• The original data stored in the USB Flash Drive can be organized or managed by a computer using the “RISO Utility Software” (RISO USB PRINT MANAGER) included on the provided CD-ROM. For details, see the “RISO Utility
Software User’s Guide” (CD-ROM).
• The [ID Print Job] is maintained even if it is copied or moved.
The procedure for copying/moving data from the Storage Memory to the USB Flash Drive is explained here.
1
Confirm that the USB Flash Drive
that will store the data is connected.
Note:
• When copying/moving the data from the USB
Flash Drive to the Storage Memory, touch [USB
Job List].
If the USB Flash Drive is not connected, connect
the USB Flash Drive to the USB slot.
2
Touch [Functions] on the MasterMaking Basic Screen.
4
Storage Selection
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
1_folder
A4
Line
Reservation
Free Area:
3
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
30/09/11
SAMPLE.doc
30/09/11
Newsletter_P2.xls
30/09/11
Images.doc
30/09/11
5
Ready to Make Master
Selections
Functions
ID Print Job
USB Job List
For details on how to select data, see steps 3 and
4 in “Retrieving Stored Data and Printing” )p.183.
Touch [Storage Memory].
Basic
98
NewsLetter.doc
View edit
Black
Close
Paper
Auto
Dot
Process
Touch the storage data to copy/
move.
Admin.
Touch [Copy/Move].
Storage Retrieve
Cancel
Retrieve
Owner: RISO
Date&Time: 30/09/11
Side Margin
Preview
Max. Scan
Overlay
Rotate
Copy/Move
Reservation
Storage Memory
Output
:Al l Pages
Ascend
ADF Semi-Auto
USB Job List
Format: A4
19:04
Clear
P . 2/4
Color:Black
P. 1 /4
Copying/Moving Stored Data 189
REG-ML_EN.book Page 190 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
6
Touch [Copy to] or [Move to].
Copy/Move
USB Flash Drive
Cancel
OK
1 usb_folder
3 usb_folder
Move to
6 usb_folder
Touch the button of the destination
folder that you want to copy or move
the data to.
Copy/Move
USB Flash Drive
Cancel
1 usb_folder
2 usb_folder
3 usb_folder
4 usb_folder
Copy to
5 usb_folder
Move to
6 usb_folder
Free Area:
190 Copying/Moving Stored Data
Important!:
• When the remaining free area of the USB Flash
Drive is limited, the following message is displayed. Touch [USB Job List] to organize the
data of USB Flash Drive, or touch [Cancel] to
cancel copying/moving.
Free Area:
7
Data is copied/moved and the selected destination folder is displayed.
Note:
4 usb_folder
5 usb_folder
Touch [OK].
• While processing the data, do not remove the
USB Flash Drive. This will cause data to disappear and the USB to malfunction.
2 usb_folder
Copy to
8
OK
The file size is too large
to store on USB flash drive
Change the USB flash drive
or delete some files
to make spaces
USB Job List
Cancel
REG-ML_EN.book Page 191 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Storing Original Data and Use Method
Copying/Moving Stored Data 191
REG-ML_EN.book Page 192 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Print Functions for Using Linked Printers
The machine may be connected with Linked Printers for more convenient operations.
2 special printing functions Auto-Link Function and Link Mode are available;
Important!:
• The RISO Network Card is required in order to connect the machine and Linked Printers.
• Please contact your dealer (or authorized service representative) for the compatible printer.
Auto-Link Function
(This function is not available for EZ591U.)
Automatically select an output device, the machine or a Linked Printer, based on a pre-determined number of copies
(Link-Free Volume).
)p.164
Even when you print by retrieving the original data stored in a USB Flash Drive or the optional Document Storage
Card, you can print the data by automatic allocation depending on the quantity.
)p.164
Linked Printer
Printed Paper
Original
Low volume printing
Standard quantity *
High volume printing
* Automatically allocated in comparison
with standard quantity
Important!:
• In the case of hard-copy originals, you need to enter print quantity before master-making. If you press the
when the quantity is “0”, the machine prints the data unconditionally.
Link Mode Function
The original is scanned on the machine and printed from the Linked Printer.
)p.197
Special Linked Printer functions such as double-sided printing can be achieved.
192 Print Functions for Using Linked Printers
key
REG-ML_EN.book Page 193 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Setting up a Linked Printer [Link Properties]
Linked Printer data must be entered in the machine in order to operate.
“Link Properties” are explained below.
See “Link Mode” ()p.164) for more information about Link Mode and other Admin. settings.
Important!:
• Make sure that the Linked Printer is physically connected to the machine. A Linked Printer cannot be recognized
by the machine unless physically connected.
• Enter information for each attached Linked Printer one device at a time.
• When there’s only one Linked Printer to the machine, set “Linked Printer” as “One-to-One”.
• Unless the Linked Printer data is entered in the machine, the device will not print, and its optional features will not
be available.
Setting up a Linked Printer
1
Touch [Link Mode] on the Admin.
screen.
3
Select a tab for the Linked Printer.
Link Properties
Cancel
OK
Admin.
Printer Name
All
Link Properties
Display
Linked Printer
Default
Link-Free Volume
System
Duplex Interval
15s
Editor
Online Auto-Link
Total Trays
PC Network
_
20
Link Mode
LBP1
IP Address
ON
P . 1/2
StandardTray
Duplex
OFF
Printer Collate
OFF
Offset Pages
OFF
Note:
• Up to 6 Linked Printers may be entered.
2
Touch [Link Properties].
4
Select the button to enter information.
Admin.
Link Properties
Cancel
All
Link Properties
Display
Linked Printer
Default
Link-Free Volume
20
System
Duplex Interval
15s
Total Trays
ON
Duplex
OFF
Printer Collate
OFF
Offset Pages
OFF
Link Mode
Editor
Online Auto-Link
PC Network
Printer Name
_
OK
LBP2
IP Address
P . 1/2
StandardTray
Note:
• To display other functions that are not visible on
the screen, touch
or
.
Setting up a Linked Printer [Link Properties] 193
REG-ML_EN.book Page 194 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
5
6
Change settings.
See “Linked Printer Setup List” ()p.194) to
change settings.
Touch
.
Returns to the Basic Screen. “Admin.” settings are
updated.
Note:
• If the function has additional Setup screens,
enter necessary settings then touch [OK].
Returns to the Link Properties screen. The
changes are updated. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the changes and return to the Link Properties screen.
Linked Printer Setup List
: Initial setting (factory default)
Functions
Printer Name
Enter a name for the Linked Printer.
Description
How to Enter
Rename
Cancel
OK
Note:
• The entered name will be displayed on the
Link Mode screen.
Small
Capital
Touch character button to enter a new
name. Once the name is entered, touch
[OK] to store it as the Printer Name. See
“Rename screen” ()p.130) for more
details.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Linked Printer to
connect to the network.
Link Properties
IP Address
Cancel
Cancel
OK
OK
Note:
• Touch [Proof Printing] to execute a data
transmission test to the Linked Printer.
When successful, the test results will print
from the Linked Printer.
• [Proof Printing] is disabled until “Base IP
Address” is correctly entered on the
Admin. screen.
)p.161
194 Setting up a Linked Printer [Link Properties]
Proof Printing
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Offset Pages
OFF
• Use
, or enter using the Print
Quantity Keys.
• To move to another field, touch the field,
or press the
key to move.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 195 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Functions
Total Trays
Enter total number of trays other than the
Standard Tray.
Description
How to Enter
0-99
Link Properties
To t a l T r a y s
Important!:
Cancel
Cancel
OK
OK
Input the total number of trays
available for output from a Linked
Printer and its peripherals.
• If the number is less than the number of
trays set in other options, other options will
be disabled.
• Enter the actual number of trays available
for the linked printer. Entering an incorrect
number will result in output from the
Standard Tray.
StandardTray
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Offset Pages
OFF
• When printing from the standard tray
of the Linked Printer, enter “0”.
• Use
, or enter using the Print
Quantity Keys.
Staple
Set “Staple” ON if the device has the
capability. Also set the tray number *1 used by
the “Staple” function and whether it is fixed/
variable.
OFF: No Staple
capability
(disabled)
ON: Staple function
available
Tray number used,
Invariable/variable
Link Properties
Staple
Cancel
Cancel
OK
OK
OFF
Tray No.
ON
Staple Position
Invaliable
Valiable
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Staple
OFF
Touch to select a button.
Use
, or enter using the Print
Quantity Keys for “Tray No.”.
Offset Pages
Set “Offset Pages” ON if the device has the
capability. Also set the tray number *1 used by
the “Offset Pages” function.
OFF: No Offset Pages
function
(disabled)
ON: Offset Pages
available
Tray number used
Link Properties
Offset Pages
Cancel
Cancel
OK
OK
OFF
Tray No.
ON
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Offset Pages
OFF
Touch to select a button.
Use
, or enter using the Print
Quantity Keys for “Tray No.”.
“Offset Pages”and “Punch” may be
configured using similar steps.
Setting up a Linked Printer [Link Properties] 195
REG-ML_EN.book Page 196 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Functions
Description
Punch
Set “Punch” ON if the device has the
capability.
Also set the tray number *1 used by the
“Punch” function.
OFF: No Punch
capability
ON: Punch function
available
Tray number used
How to Enter
Link Properties
Punch
Cancel
Cancel
OK
OK
OFF
Tray No.
ON
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
Punch
OFF
Touch to select a button.
Use
, or enter using the Print
Quantity Keys for “Tray No.”.
“Offset Pages” and “Punch” may be
configured using similar steps.
Duplex
Set “Duplex” ON if the device has the
capability.
Printer Collate
Set “Printer Collate” ON if the device has the
capability.
ADF Auto Face-up
Set “ADF Auto Face-up” ON if the device has
the capability.
*2
Output Reversal
Set “Output Reversal” ON if the device has the
capability.
ADF Auto Reversal
Set “ADF Auto Reversal” ON if the device has
the capability.
ON/OFF
Link Properties
Cancel
Duplex
OFF
Printer Collate
OFF
Offset Pages
OFF
Staple
OFF
Punch
OFF
Output Reversal
OFF
Touch each button to switch between
OFF/ON.
“Duplex”, “Printer Collate”, “ADF Auto
Face-up” and “Mailbox” may be
configured using similar steps.
Mailbox
Set “Mailbox” ON if the device has the
capability.
*1 The tray number may differ depending upon the model of the Linked Printer.
*2 This function is only available only if the machine is equipped with the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI.
196 Setting up a Linked Printer [Link Properties]
OK
REG-ML_EN.book Page 197 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Printing Scanned Original from a Linked Printer
[Link Mode]
The mode in which an original is scanned into the machine and printed from a Linked Printer is called “Link Mode”.
In Link Mode, the original is printed from the Linked Printer, regardless of the number of copies to print.
1
2
Place the original.
Place the original on the Glass Platen or in the
optional ADF unit.
To place the original, see )p.37.
Switch to Link Mode.
Press the
key on the machine to switch to
Link Mode.
From Mode Screen, touch [Link Print] to switch
to the Link Basic Screen.
When “Mode Key Pattern” is set to “Loop”, press
the
key until the Link Basic Screen is displayed.
)p.24
Page (---)
Selections
Contrast
Auto
Line
Functions
Size
If the Linked Printer has multiple feed trays, touch
[Feed Tray] to specify the tray (paper size).
1) Touch [Feed Tray] in the Link Basic Screen.
Ready for Link Print
Idle
LBP1
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
Selections
Page (Lttr)
Contrast
Functions
Size
Admin.
Feed Tray
Auto
Auto
Letter
Line
2) Select the desired paper size.
Idle
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
Select printing paper.
Book
Shadow
Ready for Link Print
LBP1
3
Ready for Link Print
Admin.
FeedLBP1
Tray
Feed Tray
1
Auto
---
A4
Basic
Book
Shadow
Page
A3
Cancel
OK Idle
MP
2 Auto
B4
1 Letter
2 Ledger
MP Statement
Line
Admin.
Feed Tray
1
A4
Note:
• While the message “Starting Up Network Card /
Acquiring Linked Printer Configuration Data
Please Wait a Moment” is displayed on the
machine, the Linked Printer information is being
retrieved via the network. Wait until the message disappears.
Book
Shadow
3) Touch [OK].
Printing Scanned Original from a Linked Printer [Link Mode] 197
REG-ML_EN.book Page 198 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
4
Select the print functions as needed.
The following functions are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7
Press the
is complete.
The setting returns to its default value.
Image Processing mode ()p.56)
Scanning Contrast ()p.58)
Size ()p.59)
Dot Process ()p.65)
Memory ()p.134)
Contrast Adj ()p.66)
Tone Curve ()p.67)
Book Shadow ()p.81)
Top Margin ()p.83)
Preview ()p.87)
Overlay ()p.187)
Reservation ()p.142)
Storage Memory ()p.183)
My Direct Access ()p.155)
Tip:
When multiple Linked Printers are connected
to the network
When multiple Linked Printers are connected to
the network, output device can be selected as
needed.
1) Touch the “Printer Name” button in the Link
Basic Screen.
Ready for Link Print
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
• If the Linked Printer has optional devices such
as a duplex unit, the optional functions are also
available.
)p.199
• Print Speed, Contrast, or Positioning cannot be
adjusted.
• When a computer sends an output signal to the
machine while it is in operation, such interrupting data may take priority, initiating a new print
job over current one.
We recommend that you set “Reservation” on
the Admin. screen to set higher priority on output jobs from Linked Printers. Data received
from the computer within specified time frame
will not be processed.
)p.142
Functions
Size
Auto
Admin.
Feed Tray
Auto
Letter
Book
Shadow
2) Select the Linked Printer to print from.
Note:
Press the
Contrast
Line
Enter the number of copies using the
Print Quantity Keys.
• To change the number, press the
then re-enter the correct number.
Selections
Page (Lttr)
The number is displayed on the Print Quantity Display.
6
Idle
LBP1
Note:
5
key when the print job
key,
key.
The scan of the original begins.
The scanned original data is sent to the Linked
Printer, and the specified number of copies is
printed from the Linked Printer.
Note:
• The current settings can be stored in Job Memory for future retrieval of the same settings.
)p.134
198 Printing Scanned Original from a Linked Printer [Link Mode]
Ready for Link Print
Link LBP1
Sw.
1
A4
2
A3
Basic
Page
Line
Close Idle
LBP1
MP
B4
LBP2
LBP3
LBP4
LBP5
Admin.
Feed Tray
1
A4
LBP6
Book
Shadow
Note:
• If a Linked Printer is experiencing an error,
that device is not available to be selected.
• If an error occurs on the selected Linked
Printer while in Link Mode, the Link Sw.
screen opens. Reselect another Linked
Printer currently available for printing.
For information on purchasing additional
Linked Printers, contact your dealer (or
authorized service representative).
REG-ML_EN.book Page 199 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Using Optional Functions on a Linked
Printer
Steps for setting up optional functions are shown below. These are available when the Linked Printer has an optional
device such as a sorter or a duplex unit installed.
Note:
• See Linked Printer User’s Guide for further details on each function.
1
Touch [Functions] in the Link Basic
Screen.
Ready for Link Print
Idle
LBP1
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
Selections
Page (Lttr)
Contrast
Functions
Admin.
Size
Feed Tray
Auto
Auto
Letter
Line
Book
Shadow
2
Select a function to modify.
Ready for Link Print
Idle
LBP1
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
Duplex
Offset Pages
Printer Collate
Staple
P .1/6
3
Make changes as needed.
See “Configurable Functions” ()p.200) to select
correct settings.
Using Optional Functions on a Linked Printer 199
REG-ML_EN.book Page 200 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Configurable Functions
: Initial setting (factory default)
Functions
Meter Display
Displays the number of
printed copies for each
Linked Printer recognized
by the machine.
Description
Screens and Steps
Related Admin. Settings
Ready for Link Print
Counter
LBP1Display
---
1LBP1 2
A4 A3
LBP2
Close
B4
Basic
Selections
LBP3
Idle
389,855
MP
---
843
Functions
421,356
LBP4
700,000
LBP5
101
Admin.
84
LBP6
P.1/6
Mailbox
Select a paper receiving
tray as an Output Tray.
ON/OFF
Tray No. 1 to n (n is the
total number of trays set
on “Total Trays” on the
Admin. screen.)
Ready for Link Print
Mailbox
LBP1
1
2
A4 OFF
A3
Basic
ON
Cancel
OK
Idle
Note:
MP
B4
Selections
Total Trays:
The total number of
trays. Set at 1 or more.
Tray No.
Functions
0
Admin.
(0--0)
(Numeric keypad is available for input)
P.1/6
• When the “Sort”
function is set to ON,
you cannot set the
“Total Trays” function.
Touch
or enter using
the Print Quantity Keys.
Offset Pages
Enable a feature to
alternately eject multiplepage print copies.
ON/OFF
Staple
Specify the positioning of
staples on printed copies.
Differs depending on
how the “Staple Position”
is set on the Admin.
screen.
Offset Pages:
Available only when
“Offset Pages” option is
ON.
---
Ready for Link Print
StapleLBP1
1
2
A4 OFF
A3
Cancel
OK
Idle
MP
B4
Basic
Selections
Functions
Admin.
• When set to
“Invariable”:
Front
Center
Rear
ON/OFF
P.1/6
• When set to “Variable”:
OFF /Front/Center/
Touch to select a button.
Rear
Punch
Select whether to punch
holes on the printed
copies.
ON/OFF
Note:
• When the “Sort”
function or the “Offset
Pages” function is set
to ON, you cannot set
the “Staple” function.
Punch:
Available only when
“Punch” option is ON.
---
200 Using Optional Functions on a Linked Printer
Staple:
Available only when
“Staple” option is ON.
Note:
• When the “Sort”
function or the “Offset
Pages” function is set
to ON, you cannot set
the “Punch” function.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 201 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Functions
Description
Output Reversal
This enables reverse
output of originals scanned
with the optional ADF unit.
ON/OFF
Printer Collate
Select to retain original
page order of the multipage prints while ejecting
into a single tray.
ON/OFF
Duplex
Print on both sides of the
paper.
Different screens and
steps apply depending on
whether or not the machine
is equipped with the
optional Auto Document
Feeder AF-VI unit or Auto
Document Feeder DX-1
unit.
• When the Auto
Document Feeder AFVI is installed
OFF/Long Edge/Short
Edge
Note:
• For instructions on how
to print double-sided,
See “Duplex Printing”
()p.202).
Screens and Steps
Related Admin. Settings
---
Output Reversal:
Available only when
“Output Reversal” option
is ON.
Printer Collate:
Available only when
“Printer Collate” option is
ON.
---
Page Total:
Odd/Even
• When the Auto
Document Feeder AFVI is not installed
OFF/Long Edge/Short
Edge
• When the Auto Document
Feeder AF-VI is installed
Ready for Link Print
Duplex
LBP1
1
2
A4 A3
Basic
Cancel
MP
B4
OK
Idle
A
A B
B
FunctionsShort Edge Admin.
Long Edge
OFFSelections
Page Total
Even
Odd
P.1/6
Touch to select a button.
• When the Auto Document
Feeder AF-VI is not
installed
---
Ready for Link Print
Duplex
LBP1
1
2
A4 A3
Basic
Cancel
MP
B4
OK
Idle
A
A B
B
FunctionsShort Edge Admin.
Long Edge
OFFSelections
P.1/6
Important!:
• Some optional functions may not be enabled concurrently, depending on the model and option configuration of the
Linked Printer.
Using Optional Functions on a Linked Printer 201
REG-ML_EN.book Page 202 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Duplex Printing
[Duplex]
Double-sided printing is possible when a Duplex Unit (Option) is installed to a Linked Printer.
Note:
• The “Duplex” settings can be made from either Master Making or Print Functions screens.
Linked Printer will print following the specifics set via either of these screens.
Using the Glass Platen or Auto Document Feeder AF-VI
This setting is available when a connected Linked Printer is equipped with the optional duplex printing unit.
1
Touch [Duplex] on the Functions
screen.
Scanning orientations and duplex
binding directions.
Original
Orientation
Ready for Link Print
Idle
LBP1
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
Selections
Functions
Vertical
(Portrait)
Horizontal
(Landscape)
Binding
Direction
Admin.
Duplex
Offset Pages
Printer Collate
Staple
Long Edge
P .1/6
Short Edge
2
Set duplex binding direction.
Set the binding direction as shown below. The
combination of scanning orientation and binding
direction will result in different styles.
202 Duplex Printing [Duplex]
3
Select the number of originals.
When scanning an original from the optional ADF
unit, select either [Even] or [Odd] numbers to
match the number of original sheets.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 203 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Important!:
• This step is not necessary unless using the
ADF unit. Continue on to step 4.
6
1
2
A4 A3
Basic
Cancel
MP
B4
OK
Idle
A
A B
B
FunctionsShort Edge Admin.
Long Edge
OFFSelections
Page Total
Even
Odd
P .1/6
4
Touch [OK].
7
Ready for Link Print
Duplex
LBP1
1
2
A4 A3
Basic
Cancel
MP
B4
OK
Idle
B
• To change the number, press the
then re-enter the correct number.
Page Total
Odd
P .1/6
Note:
• To cancel Duplex Printing, touch [OFF] then
[OK].
5
Place the original.
Enter the number of copies using the
Print Quantity Keys.
Note:
FunctionsShort Edge Admin.
Long Edge
OFFSelections
Even
Image Processing mode ()p.56)
Scanning Contrast ()p.58)
Size ()p.59)
Paper Size ()p.63)
Dot Process ()p.65)
Memory ()p.134)
Contrast Adj ()p.66)
Tone Curve ()p.67)
Book Shadow ()p.81)
Top Margin ()p.83)
Preview ()p.87)
Overlay ()p.187)
Storage Memory ()p.183)
My Direct Access ()p.155)
Reservation ()p.142)
The number is displayed on the Print Quantity Display.
A
A B
The following functions are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ready for Link Print
Duplex
LBP1
Select Print functions as needed.
8
Press the
key,
key.
The next steps are different, depending on
whether the original is scanned from Glass Platen,
or from the ADF unit.
Perform one of the following steps:
Important!:
• Either Glass Platen or ADF unit may be used,
but not both at a time.
Note:
• For information about placing the original, see
step 4, “Printing from a Paper Document or
Book”.()p.39)
• To scan a single sheet of an original, place it on
the Glass Platen.
• When Duplex Printing from odd number of originals scanned in the ADF unit, the reverse side
of the last page will be blank.
Duplex Printing [Duplex] 203
REG-ML_EN.book Page 204 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
‹ Using the Glass Platen
Place the first original document on the Glass
Platen, wait for the message “Duplex Processing for Linked Printer” to disappear, then place
the second original and press the
key.
<Duplex Processing for Linked Printer>
Reverse-Page Scan->START / Simplex->STOP
Idle
LBP1
MP
1
2
Lttr Ldgr Stmt
Basic
Image (Lttr)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Admin.
Feed Tray
Auto
Line
Auto
Letter
Book
Shadow
Once data for both sides of the paper is transmitted, the Linked Printer will print the specified
number of copies.
To print multiple Duplex Print copies, repeat
steps 5-8 of Duplex Printing.
Important!:
• Once the first original is scanned, the next original must be placed within pre-determined
Duplex Interval period on the Admin. screen
()p.164). Failure to do so will result in the
Linked Printer printing one side only.
Note:
• Pressing the
key without placing the second original will also result in the Linked Printer
printing one side only.
• Setting adjustment can be made on the following functions after placing the second original
and before its scan starts:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Image Processing mode ()p.56)
Scanning Contrast ()p.58)
Size ()p.59)
Dot Process ()p.65)
Contrast Adj ()p.66)
Tone Curve ()p.67)
My Direct Access ()p.155)
‹ Using the ADF unit
The top sheet is scanned first.
As each original page is scanned, the Linked
Printer prints specified number of copies.
204 Duplex Printing [Duplex]
REG-ML_EN.book Page 205 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
When using a Linked Printer
Duplex Printing [Duplex] 205
REG-ML_EN.book Page 206 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables
The machine checks and reports on remaining amount of ink, master, as well as the space left in the disposal box.
Note:
• The report may not be displayed if detection fails.
• The reported amount is for reference only and may not be perfectly accurate.
1
Touch [i Info] on the Basic Screen.
Indicator/
Message
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Functions
Contrast
Size
Display Details
The black bar indicates
the remaining amount.
Ex:
approximately 10% left
Admin.
Paper
Auto
A4
Line
Dot
Process
Reservation
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
Description
(Unknown),
---,
no display
Indicates that consumable
data is not available, is not
set, etc.
‹ About the “My Counter” screen
2
Check for remaining amount of consumables.
Info
Close
Consumables Amount
When the “Management Level” in the User
Management is set to “High/Full Management”, touch [My Counter] to display “My
Counter” screen.
On the “My Counter” screen, you can confirm
the current user’s Limit C/C, M/C and Present
C/C, M/C. Limit C/C and M/C are set by the
administrator. Consult your administrator for
details.
Master
Ink
My Counter
Disposal Box Space
Disposal
U-1(G-1)
Date and Time
08 / 10/ 2011
15 : 32
Limit C/C
My Counter
Drum Information
A3
Black
Ink Saving
When running low, be sure to restock supply.
• Master ()p.208)
• Ink ()p.211)
• Master Disposal (used master) ()p.213)
206 Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables
Present C/C
Limit M/C
Present M/C
Close
REG-ML_EN.book Page 207 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Tip:
Information Button
icon on the
Information Button displays current status of the consumables as detected by the
machine.
The
icon will change depending on the matching information detected from the consumable.
• When matching information was correctly
retrieved from the consumable
(normal display)
• When matching information is not available
(gray display)
When the
icon is grayed, the remaining
amount of master/ink cannot be displayed.
When the master material or ink runs low,
(master) or
(ink) icon blinks on the right of
the button to let you know that the item should
soon be replaced.
Note:
• If the machine is unable to retrieve matching
data from the consumable, you must enter the
correct setting value.
)p.239
Check for Remaining Amount of Consumables 207
REG-ML_EN.book Page 208 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Master Roll
When the Master Roll is depleted, a message is displayed and the machine stops. Replace with a new Master Roll.
Important!:
• For the Master Roll, it is recommended to use the products specified by Riso.
• Keep the power ON while replacing the master.
1
Open the Front Cover.
3
Pull out the Master Making Unit.
Master Making Unit Handle
2
Grasp the Master Making Unit Handle and pull forward.
Check the indicator of the Master
Making Unit Release Button is ON.
Master Making
Unit Release Button
Pull out slowly until it stops.
If the indicator is off, press the Master Making Unit
Release Button to turn it on.
Important!:
• When the Print Drum (Cylinder) is out, Master
Making Unit cannot be pulled out. Return the
Print Drum (Cylinder) into position and press
the Master Making Unit Release Button.
)p.215
4
Open the Master Making Unit Cover.
Master Making Unit Cover
Master Making Unit Cover Lever
Grasp the Master Making Unit Cover Lever and
open the Master Making Unit Cover.
208 Replacing the Master Roll
REG-ML_EN.book Page 209 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
5
Open the Master Roll Holder.
Important!:
• Take care not to damage the
section when
removing the shrink wrap.
If the
section is bent or the perforation cut,
the master will become unusable.
• Do not remove the tape yet.
Master Roll Holder
8
6
Close the Master Roll Holder.
Remove the depleted Master core.
Remove the tape once the Master Roll Holder has
been closed.
9
Insert the leading edge of the master
under the Master Guide Flap.
Master Guide Flap
Note:
• Dispose the depleted master core according to
the disposal rule of your local community.
)p.218
7
Install a new Master Roll.
Flange
Insert the leading edge of the master into its
entrance under the Master Guide Flap and
advance it as far in as it will go ( ). If the Master
is loose, turn the flange at the right towards the
rear and rewind ( ).
Do not remove
the tape
Remove the plastic shrink wrap from the new
Master Roll, and place in with the
mark to the
left.
Replacing the Master Roll 209
REG-ML_EN.book Page 210 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Tip:
If You Cannot Insert the Master
Insert the leading edge of the Master using the following steps.
1) Raise the Master Guide Flap
2)
3)
Turn the dial on the edge of the Master Guide
Flap towards the rear and raise the Master
Guide Flap.
Pull out the master to the line indicated by the
arrow.
Lower the Master Guide Flap.
Return each part to its original posi10 tion.
Close the Master Making Unit Cover.
Return the Master Making Unit to its original position and close the Front Cover.
210 Replacing the Master Roll
REG-ML_EN.book Page 211 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Ink Cartridge
When the ink is depleted, a message is displayed and the machine stops.
Replace with a new Ink Cartridge.
BCaution:
• Ink may be left on the area around the Print Drum (Cylinder), so take care not to smudge your hands or clothes.
• Wash immediately with soap if you should get ink on your hands, etc.
Important!:
• For the Ink Cartridge, it is recommended to use the products specified by RISO.
• Keep the power ON while replacing the Ink Cartridge.
• Replace with an Ink Cartridge of the same ink color (colour). If you want to change the ink color (colour), replace
the Print Drum (Cylinder) itself.
)p.215
1
Open the Front Cover.
3
Remove the cap on the new Ink Cartridge.
Turn the Ink Cartridge cap to remove.
2
Pull the empty Ink Cartridge out of
the holder.
Important!:
• Do not touch or give impact to the outlet surface
of the new Ink Cartridge.
Do not peel off the label beside the Ink Cartridge opening.
Unlock
Turn the Ink Cartridge to the counter clockwise
( ) and then pull it out.
Note:
• Dispose the empty Ink Cartridge according to
the disposal rule of your local community.
)p.218
Replacing the Ink Cartridge 211
REG-ML_EN.book Page 212 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Note:
• You can store the Ink Cartridge cap on the
upper left of the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Ink Cartridge Cap Holder
4
Insert the new Ink Cartridge.
Align the arrow on the Ink Cartridge to the
mark on the drum (cylinder) unit, and insert until it
stops.
5
Lock the Ink Cartridge.
Lock
Turn the Ink Cartridge clockwise (
position.
212 Replacing the Ink Cartridge
) and lock in
6
Close the Front Cover.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 213 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Emptying the Master Disposal Box
Used masters are held in the Master Disposal Box. When the Master Disposal Box becomes full, a message displays
and the machine stops. Discard the used masters.
BCaution:
• Wash immediately with soap if you should get ink on your hands, etc.
Important!:
• The Master Disposal Box can be padlocked to prevent the information contained in the discarded master from
being leaked. If the Master Disposal Box is safely protected by the padlock, be sure to contact the administrator
before discarding the master.
• When “Protect” is ON, you can remove the Master Disposal Box only when the messages such as “Master Disposal Box is Full” or “Master Jammed in Disposal Unit” are displayed. )p.173
1
Remove the Master Disposal Box.
If the Master Disposal Box lever is locked, slide
the lever to the right to unlock.
2
Discard the ejected masters.
Push Out Lever
Unlock
Tilt the Master Disposal Box forward and directly
discard the used master into the garbage box (or
bag) by grasping the Push Out Lever.
3
Place the Master Disposal Box into
position.
Grasp the Master Disposal Box handle and pull
the box forward.
Master Disposal Box handle
Insert the Master Disposal Box until it stops.
Important!:
• If the Master Disposal Box is padlocked, contact the administrator to undo the padlock.
Emptying the Master Disposal Box 213
REG-ML_EN.book Page 214 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Note:
• If necessary, slide the lever to the left to lock the
Master Disposal Box and also have the padlock
for further safety.
)p.173
Lock
• Dispose the ejected masters according to the
disposal rule of your local community.
)p.218
214 Emptying the Master Disposal Box
REG-ML_EN.book Page 215 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Print Drum (Cylinder)
(Color (colour) Change)
When replacing with a Color Drum (Cylinder) to change colors (colours), or when removing jammed paper, follow the
steps to remove Print Drum (Cylinder). Be sure to use a Color Drum (Cylinder) specifically designed and approved
for use with this machine.
BCaution:
• Do not stand the Print Drum (Cylinder) upright. Doing so may stain the floor, etc.
Important!:
• Use only Print Drums (Cylinders) specifically designed and approved for use with this machine.
• Keep the power ON while removing or replacing the Print Drum (Cylinder).
• Make sure to place the changed Print Drum (Cylinder) into the drum (cylinder) case and store horizontally.
Removing the Print Drum (Cylinder)
1
Open the Front Cover.
Important!:
• When the Master Making Unit is out, the Print
Drum (Cylinder) cannot be pulled out. Return
the Master Making Unit into position and press
the Print Drum (Cylinder) Release button.
)p.208
3
2
Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Check that the indicator of the Print
Drum (Cylinder) Release Button is
ON.
Print Drum (Cylinder)
Handle
Grasp the Print Drum (Cylinder) Handle and
slowly pull until the Print Drum (Cylinder) is completely extended.
Print Drum
(Cylinder)
Release Button
If the indicator is off, press the Print Drum (Cylinder) Release Button to turn it on.
Replacing the Print Drum (Cylinder) (Color (colour) Change) 215
REG-ML_EN.book Page 216 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
4
Remove the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Firmly grasp
the Green Handle
Use both hands to lift the Print Drum (Cylinder)
straight up to remove from the rail.
Proceed with replacing the drum (cylinder),
removing the paper jam, etc..
BCaution:
• Do not touch the connector on the Print Drum
(Cylinder).
Neglecting this may result in malfunction of the
Print Drum (Cylinder) because of static electricity or other factors.
216 Replacing the Print Drum (Cylinder) (Color (colour) Change)
REG-ML_EN.book Page 217 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Installing the Print Drum (Cylinder)
1
Place the Print Drum (Cylinder) on
the Rail.
Important!:
• Do not grasp the Print Drum (Cylinder) Handle
when pushing in the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Tip:
Changing the Drum (Cylinder) Type
When you install a different type of Print Drum
(Cylinder), the Confirm Drum (Cylinder) Type
screen appears.
Ready to Make Master
F17
Basic
Selections
Functions
!!The Print Drum Type
has been Changed!!
Select the Current
Print Drum Type
Align the
mark on the Print Drum (Cylinder)
with the
mark on the guide, and place the Print
Drum (Cylinder) horizontally onto the rail.
A4-R Drum
A3 Drum
Note:
Admin.
OK
P .1/3
• If the Print Drum (Cylinder) was manually
rotated, be sure to turn it back so that
and
marks align, after it is placed on the rail.
1) Select the type corresponding to the installed
2)
Print Drum (Cylinder).
Touch [OK].
The Print Drum (Cylinder) type is confirmed
and printing is enabled.
Important!:
2
Return the Print Drum (Cylinder) to
its original position.
• You will not be able to print until the Print
Drum (Cylinder) type is confirmed.
• If you install a non-approved Color Drum
(Cylinder), the message “Wrong-Type Print
Drum (Cylinder) Installed Replace with
Correct Type” is displayed. Install a Color
Drum (Cylinder) specifically approved for
use with this machine.
Push the Print Drum (Cylinder) in as far as it will
go, and then close the Front Cover.
Replacing the Print Drum (Cylinder) (Color (colour) Change) 217
REG-ML_EN.book Page 218 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
Disposal of Depleted Consumables
Dispose of depleted Ink Cartridges, Master cores, ejected masters according to the regulations in your local community.
If required, separate the specific components using the following procedures to dispose them properly.
‹ Ink Cartridge
Remove the label (metal included) at the arrow from the outlet surface of the Ink Cartridge, and then dispose them
separately.
Because ink may have adhered to the outlet surface of the Ink Cartridge, be careful not to smudge your clothes.
Parts
Ink Cartridge material
Label material
Ink
Materials
plastic (polypropylene/polyethylene)
plastic (metal included)
Soy oil, petroleum hydrocarbons, water, pigments
‹ Master core
A metallic component has been attached to the bottom of the end section having the
mark stamped.
Because the component section has been perforated for cutout convenience, tear along the perforation for proper
disposal.
Parts
Core material
Master material
Material of the cutout component
218 Disposal of Depleted Consumables
Materials
Paper
plastic, Japanese paper
plastic (metal included) and paper
REG-ML_EN.book Page 219 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Replacing Consumables
‹ Ejected Master
Parts
Master material
Ink material
Materials
plastic, Japanese paper
Soy oil, petroleum hydrocarbons, water, pigments
Note:
• It is made of carbon and hydrogen compounds. If fully combusted, it will turn into water and carbon dioxide.
Disposal of Depleted Consumables 219
REG-ML_EN.book Page 220 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Maintenance
Cleaning
The print quality may suffer if parts such as Thermal Print Head of the Master Making Unit, Scanner Glass of the ADF
unit (Option), White Roller, etc. are contaminated with dust, dirt, ink, white-out, etc.
Follow the steps below for periodic cleaning.
AWARNING:
• Before cleaning any part of the machine, turn off the power.
• Do not remove any fixed covers.
• Contact your service representative immediately if you suspect any dangerous situations or have questions or
problems with the machine.
• Contact your service representative before moving the machine.
• Do not allow unauthorized persons to make adjustments or repairs.
BCaution:
• The machine has precision moving parts inside. Do not handle the machine in any other way than described in this
manual.
• Be careful of the edge of metal parts, otherwise it may cause an injury.
• Do not make any modifications to the machine or remove any parts.
• Neither RISO nor its dealer is responsible for maintenance service performed by non-RISO-authorized personnel.
220 Cleaning
REG-ML_EN.book Page 221 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Maintenance
Thermal Print Head
Clean the Thermal Print Head each time you replace the Master Roll.
Open the Master Making Unit Cover, and gently wipe the Thermal Print Head in the back of the unit several times with
a soft cloth or tissue.
BCaution:
• Since the Thermal Print Head is very delicate, avoid shocks or scratches with a hard object.
• Since Thermal Print Head is susceptible to (damage by) static electricity, please be sure to remove the static electricity charged in the body before cleaning.
Glass Platen and Platen Cover Pad
If the Glass Platen and/or Platen Cover Pad is stained, gently wipe them with a soft cloth or tissue.
Glass Platen
Platen Cover Pad
BCaution:
• Since the Glass Platen is very delicate, avoid shocks or scratches with a hard object.
Cleaning 221
REG-ML_EN.book Page 222 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Maintenance
Scanner Glass and White Roller of ADF unit (Option)
Gently wipe the Scanner Glass, and the White Roller several times with a soft cloth or tissue.
Scanner Glass
White Roller
BCaution:
• Since the Glass Platen is very delicate, avoid shocks or scratches with a hard object.
Pressure Roller
If the Pressure Roller, which presses print paper against the Print Drum (Cylinder), is stained, smudged strips may
appear on the back of copies.
If this happens, gently wipe the Pressure Roller with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.
To remove the Print Drum (Cylinder), see )p.215.
BCaution:
• Be sure to turn OFF power to the machine when cleaning the Pressure Roller.
• When putting your hand into the unit, do not touch the paper separation hook or master removal hook. The sharp
tips of the hooks can hurt your hand.
• Ink may be left on the area near the Print Drum (Cylinder), so take care not to smudge your hands or clothes. Wash
immediately with soap if you should get ink on your hands, etc.
Master Removal Hook
Separation Hook
222 Cleaning
REG-ML_EN.book Page 223 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Maintenance
The Exterior
Use a soft cloth to gently wipe down the entire printer on a regular basis in order to prevent the exterior from getting
dirty.
If using a cleaning agent, use one recommended by your authorized service representative.
BCaution:
• Because the machine exterior is plastic, never use alcohol or solvent when cleaning.
• The Display may be cleaned by gently wiping with a dry cloth. Dampen a cloth with a small amount of cleaner and
gently wipe to remove any ink.
Do not spray or pour cleaner solution directly onto the display. Doing so can cause damage.
Cleaning 223
REG-ML_EN.book Page 224 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
When a Message Displays
Refer to the following information to determine the cause and take appropriate actions when the machine stops operating and a message is displayed.
Error Message Layout
A message and a troubleshooting illustration will be displayed in accordance with the message type to show how to
resolve the problem.
1) Error Number
1
2)
2
3)
A34
Master Not Set in Place
Insert Lead Edge of Master into Master
Entrance and Close Master Making Unit
4)
3
Meter Display
Error Number
error type and error ID number
Error Messages
description of the error and actions to resolve the
problem
Graphic Area
visually demonstrates how to resolve the problem
Meter Display
touch to display the “Meter Display” window
4
Error Types
Description
T00-000
Service Call Errors
Errors that require repair or inspection by an
authorized service representative.
To resolve a Service Call Error, contact your dealer
(or authorized service representative) with the
error number.
)p.225
A00-000
Master Jam Errors
Displays when the master is jammed, etc..
)p.225
B00-000
Optional Device
Errors
Displays when an error occurs on the optional
device.
)p.226
C00-000
Consumable Errors
Displays when a consumable such as ink or master
roll is depleted.
)p.227
D00-000
Installation Errors
Displays when a part or unit is not properly
installed.
)p.228
J00-000
Paper Jam Errors
Displays when an original document or printing
paper is jammed.
)p.230
224 When a Message Displays
Reference
page
REG-ML_EN.book Page 225 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
T00-000:Service Call Errors (in alphabetical order)
Message
!!Battery Replacement!!
Call Service
Possible Cause
Action
The battery is low or depleted.
Contact your dealer (or authorized service
representative) and have the battery
replaced.
Press the
key or the
key to clear
the error message display.
!!System Error!!
A system error has occurred.
Press Reset Key
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Press the
key.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer
(or authorized service representative).
!!System Error!!
Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Shut off power, then restart.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer
(or authorized service representative).
A00-000:Master Jam Errors (in alphabetical order)
Message
Master Disposal Error
Pull Out Print Drum (Cylinder) and
Discard Master
Possible Cause
The master was not properly
discarded.
Action
1) Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
2)
3)
remove the master from the drum (cylinder).
)p.215
Return the Print Drum (Cylinder) in place.
Press the
key.
Master Jammed in Disposal Unit
Pull Out Master Disposal Box and
Remove Jammed Master
The master is jammed in the
Master Disposal Unit.
Pull out the Master Disposal Box and
remove the jammed master.
If the masters are difficult to remove, pull out
the Print Drum (Cylinder) and then remove.
)p.213
If the error persists, contact your dealer (or
authorized service representative).
Master Loading Error
Pull Out Print Drum (Cylinder) and
Discard Master
The master did not properly
attach to the Print Drum
(Cylinder).
1) Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
2)
3)
remove the master from the drum (cylinder).
)p.215
Return the Print Drum (Cylinder) in place.
Press the
key.
Master Mis-Feed
Pull Out Master Making Unit and
Rewind Master Roll, then
Reset Master in Place
The master is improperly
installed.
Pull out the Master Making Unit, rewind
the master and reinstall.
)p.208
Master Not Set in Place
Insert Lead Edge of Master into
Master
Entrance and Close Master Making
Unit
The master is improperly
installed or is missing.
Pull out the Master Making Unit and
reinstall the master.
)p.208
Important!:
• If the leading edge of the master is
wrinkled or torn, cut the edge straight
and reinstall.
When a Message Displays 225
REG-ML_EN.book Page 226 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Master Remains on Print Drum
(Cylinder)
Pull Out Print Drum (Cylinder) and
Remove Master
Possible Cause
An unnecessary master
remains on the Print Drum
(Cylinder).
Action
1) Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
2)
remove the master from the drum (cylinder).
)p.215
Return the Print Drum (Cylinder) in place.
3) Press the
Paper Jam
Remove Paper in Indicated Areas
and Press [OK] Button
Paper jammed in indicated
area.
key.
1) Remove the jammed paper.
2) Press the
key or touch [OK].
Safety SW on Standard Feed Tray The safety switch for the
Check underneath the Standard Feed
is Activated
Standard Feed Tray (Paper
Tray (Paper Feed Tray) and on top of the
Reset paper on Standard Feed Tray Feed Tray) has been activated. printing paper for any obstructions.
Remove if any exist.
System Error in Master Making Unit The cutter mechanism for the
Take Out Master and then
master malfunctioned.
Close Master Making Unit Cover
Pull out the Master Making Unit and
remove the master.
)p.208
Closing the Master Making Unit Cover will
reset the error. Setup the master again.
B00-000:Optional Device Errors (in alphabetical order)
Message
Possible Cause
Action
Can not identify
• Something other than the
Connect a USB Flash Drive for this
USB Flash Drive is
machine.
connected to the USB slot.
)p.12
• A defective USB Flash Drive
is connected to the USB slot.
• A USB Flash Drive not
recognized for this machine
is connected to the USB slot.
Can not identify (USB hub)
A USB hub is connected to the
USB slot.
Connect the correct corresponding USB
Flash Drive.
)p.12
Insert Card in Key/Card Counter
No card in the Key Card
Counter (option).
Insert Card in the Key Card Counter.
!! Job Separator is OFF !!
Turn On Power Switch of it
The Job Separator (option) is
turned OFF.
Turn on the Job Separator.
Linked Printer in Error
A Service Call Error has
occurred on the Linked Printer.
Check the Linked Printer and resolve the
error.
No IP Address Assigned to This
IP address for the machine is
Printer
not properly set.
Contact Your Network Administrator
226 When a Message Displays
Contact your system administrator and set
the machine IP address correctly.
)p.161
REG-ML_EN.book Page 227 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Possible Cause
Action
!! No Linked Printer Detected !!
Linked Printer may not be
Check Cable Connection and Power turned ON; cable may not be
Supply for Linked Printer
properly connected; connection
may be interrupted.
Check that the Linked Printer has been
switched on.
Check to make sure all cables are
properly connected. If properly connected,
check the server and network
communication status and consult with the
server and network communication
administrator.
No Paper Tape in Job Separator
Replace Tape Roll
No tape in the Job Separator
(option).
Load new tape into the Job Separator.
No Toner in Linked Printer
No toner in the Linked Printer.
Replace toner in the Linked Printer.
Paper Jam
Remove Paper in Indicated Areas
and Press [OK] Button
Paper jammed in indicated
area.
1) Remove the jammed paper.
Paper Tape Jam in Job Separator
Remove Paper Tape
Tape jam occurred in the Job
Separator (option).
Check the Job Separator and remove
jammed tape.
!!System Error!!
A system error has occured.
Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
2) Press the
key or touch [OK].
Shut off power, then restart.
If recovery has failed, contact your dealer
(or authorized service representative).
C00-000:Consumable Errors (in alphabetical order)
Message
Possible Cause
Action
Add Paper
No printing paper in the Paper
Feed Tray.
Load paper into the Paper Feed Tray.
)p.32
Master Disposal Box is Full
Empty Master Disposal Box
The Master Disposal Box is full. Empty the Master Disposal Box.
)p.213
No Ink
Replace Ink Cartridge
The ink is depleted.
Replace and install a new Ink Cartridge.
Use the Ink Cartridge specifically
designed and approved for use with this
machine
)p.211
Important!:
• If the error persists after replacing the
Ink Cartridge, check for proper
installation of the Ink Cartridge.
No Master
Replace Master Roll
The Master Roll is depleted.
Install a new Master Roll.
Use Master Roll specifically designed and
approved for use with this machine
)p.208
When a Message Displays 227
REG-ML_EN.book Page 228 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
D00-000:Installation Errors (in alphabetical order)
Message
Possible Cause
Action
Close Front Cover
The Front Cover is open or
improperly closed.
Check for the magnet underneath the
Front Cover and firmly close.
Close Master Making Unit Cover
The Master Making Unit Cover
is open or is improperly
installed.
Pull out the Master Making Unit, check
and firmly close its cover.
Install Ink Cartridge
The Ink Cartridge is improperly
installed or is missing.
Properly install the Ink Cartridge.
)p.211
Master Making Unit has been
Unlocked
The Master Making Unit is
ready to be pulled out.
Pull out the Master Making Unit.
Print Drum (Cylinder) has been
Unlocked
The Print Drum (Cylinder) is
ready to be pulled out.
Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder).
Print Drum (Cylinder) Not Set in
Place
Press Print Drum (Cylinder) Release
Button and
Pull Out Print Drum (Cylinder)
after the Button Lights
The Print Drum (Cylinder) is
locked but not pushed in
properly.
Push the Print Drum (Cylinder) in as far as
it will go and press the Print Drum
(Cylinder) Release Button . Remove the
Print Drum (Cylinder) after the button is lit
and reinstall.
Rear Cover of Main Body is Off
Call Service
The machine rear cover is
removed.
Contact your dealer (or authorized service
representative).
Set Master Disposal Box in Place
The Master Disposal Box is
improperly set or is missing.
Properly set the Master Disposal Box.
)p.213
Set Master in Place
No master is installed.
Install a Master Roll.
)p.208
Set Master Making Unit in Place
The Master Making Unit is
missing or is improperly
installed.
Properly install the Master Making Unit.
)p.208
Set Print Drum (Cylinder) in Place
The Print Drum (Cylinder) is
improperly set or is missing.
Properly install the Print Drum (Cylinder).
)p.215
Wrong-type Ink Cartridge Installed
or Cannot Read Ink Info
Replace Ink Cartridge
or Contact dealer/Riso office
Inappropriate Ink Cartridge is
installed.
Properly install a correct Ink Cartridge.
)p.211
Important!:
• Use the Ink Cartridge specifically
designed and approved for use with this
machine. Failure to do so may cause
problems or damage to the machine.
The label on the Ink Cartridge
outlet surface has come off or
surface is with dirt.
228 When a Message Displays
The label on the Ink Cartridge outlet
surface contains information needed for
printing. If the machine cannot read the
information, it does not operate.
Set an Ink Cartridge that is specific to the
machine and that is with label attachment
and free from dirt.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 229 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Wrong-type Master Installed
or Cannot Read Master Info
Replace Master Roll
or Contact dealer/Riso office
Wrong-Type Print Drum (Cylinder)
Installed
Replace with Correct Type
Possible Cause
Incorrect master is installed.
Action
Set a correct Master Roll.
)p.208
Important!:
• Use a Master Roll specifically designed
and approved for use with this machine.
Failure to do so may cause problems or
damage to the machine.
The
section on the master
core is missing, or it has worn
off, or it has been tilted.
The
section on the master core
contains information needed for making
masters.
If the machine cannot read the
information, it does not operate. Set a
dedicated Master Roll that has the
mark and is free from wear and tilt.
Incorrect Print Drum (Cylinder)
is installed.
Install a correct Print Drum (Cylinder).
)p.215
Important!:
• Use a Print Drum (Cylinder) specifically
designed and approved for use with this
machine. Failure to do so may cause
problems or damage to the machine.
When a Message Displays 229
REG-ML_EN.book Page 230 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
J00-000:Paper Jam Errors
Displays when the original document or printing paper is jammed
inside the machine, the ADF unit (Option) or Sorter (option).
The location of the paper jam is indicated by the flashing icon
( - ) in the illustration. Refer to the table below ( - ) and
resolve the issue as indicated.
J08
Paper Jam
Remove Paper in Indicated Areas
and Press [OK] Button
Note:
• Use appropriate printing paper to prevent paper jams. Also
select appropriate original document suitable for the ADF unit
(Option).
)p.15
)p.17
Area
Indicated/
Blinking
OK
Possible Cause
Paper is jammed in the Paper Feed area.
Action
1) Check the paper feed side and remove the
jammed paper.
2) Reload printing paper.
3) Press the
key if error display does not clear.
When using special paper, adjust the Paper
Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever according
to the paper characteristics. )p.33
The original is jammed in the ADF unit (Option). Removing in the document insertion direction
Pull the ADF Original Release Lever (Option) to
the right, and remove the original.
ADF Original Release Lever
When removing in the document ejection
direction
Raise the Platen Cover, turn the ADF Original
Release Dial and remove the original.
Original Release Dial
230 When a Message Displays
REG-ML_EN.book Page 231 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Area
Indicated/
Blinking
Possible Cause
Paper is jammed in the Print Drum (Cylinder)
area.
Action
1) Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder).
2)
)p.215
Remove the jammed paper.
3) Return the Print Drum (Cylinder) in place.
4) Touch [OK].
BCaution:
• Do not touch the separation hook or master
removal hook when putting your hand into the
unit to remove paper. The sharp tips of the
hooks can hurt your hand.
Master Removal Hook Separation Hook
Paper did not eject correctly.
1) Check for any jammed paper on the paper
2)
exit area.
Touch [OK].
Note:
• When using special paper, adjust the
Paper Arranger on the Receiving Tray
Paper Guides according to the paper
characteristics.
)p.32
When a Message Displays 231
REG-ML_EN.book Page 232 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Pop-Up Message Layout
Pop-Up Messages communicates various operational statuses.
You can continue operation over some of them, but depending upon the context, others will require your action before
operations can be resumed.
1) Error Number
1
A reference letter (E/F) and an ID number.
2) Pop-Up Messages
Content of the message.
F02
Page Format is Larger
than Paper Size
!! Possible Ink Smudges
on Prints !!
Cancel
2
Continue
Error Number
Error Types
Description
Reference
page
E00-000
Maintenance Call
Pops up when battery replacement or a routine
inspection by a service personnel is required.
)p.232
F00-000
Warning Messages
Pops up when printing job cannot proceed due to a
conflict between a Control Panel setting and the
status of the machine.
)p.233
E00-000:Maintenance Call (in alphabetical order)
Message
!!Battery Replacement!!
Call Service
Symptom/Action
(Symptom)
Low battery.
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
(Action)
Contact your dealer (or authorized
service representative) and have the
battery replaced.
!!Maintenance!!
Call Service
(Symptom)
Notifies user of need for a periodic
maintenance.
(Action)
Consult your dealer (or authorized service
representative).
232 When a Message Displays
REG-ML_EN.book Page 233 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
F00-000:Warning Messages (in alphabetical order)
Message
Acquiring Linked Printer
Configuration Data
Please Wait a Moment
Symptom/Action
(Symptom)
The machine system is retrieving Linked
Printer information. Link Mode printing is
disabled while the retrieval is underway.
(Action)
Start printing after the information has
been completely retrieved from Linked
Printer.
Or, print from the machine.
Auto Page Size Selection
is Not Available for
Irregular-Size Original
Select Format Size to Store
and then Restart
(Cause 1)
Attempting to scan an irregular-size
original using “Auto” in scanning mode.
(Action)
Select the original size manually.
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
Touch [Close] to clear the Pop-Up
Message and return to the previous
screen.
• When printing from the machine;
Press the
key or the
key.
• When printing from a Linked
Printer;
Wait until the information has been
retrieved. (This may take several
minutes.)
• To specify the format for saving
Touch [Saving Format].
• To cancel scanning
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
(Cause 2)
A normal-size original has been set in
the wrong position.
(Action)
Lift the Platen Cover Pad up and set the
original correctly.
!!Auto-Link Operation is
Not Available!!
Specified Linked Printer
may be in Error or
Turned OFF
(Symptom)
Linked Printer is sending an error signal.
Link Mode has been activated due to
low print volume since “Link-Free
Volume” is currently set to ON.
(Action)
After canceling the Linked Printer error,
print again.
Or, print after switching to another
Linked Printer or print from the machine.
)p.164
• When returning to the Master
Screen;.
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
• When changing to another
available Linked Printer;
Touch [Link Switch] and select
another Linked Printer on the Link Sw.
screen.
([Link Switch] will not display if no
other Linked Printer is available.)
)p.198
When a Message Displays 233
REG-ML_EN.book Page 234 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Auto Paper Size Selection
is Not Available
for Irregular-Size Original
Select Paper Size Manually
and then Press START Key
Symptom/Action
(Cause 1)
Attempting to copy an irregular-size
original using “Auto”.
(Action)
Select a Feed Tray with the correct size
paper.
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
• To select the Feed Tray
Touch the button of the Feed Tray you
wish to use.
• To stop the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
(Cause 2)
A normal-size original has been set in
the wrong position.
(Action)
Lift the Platen Cover Pad up and set the
original correctly.
!! Book Shadow Editor
is Not Available
with ADF !!
Place Original on
Glass Platen
(Symptom)
ADF is disabled while Book Shadow
function is active.
Check Stock of
Required Ink and
Please Order If Needed
(Symptom)
The remaining quantity of Ink Cartridge
or Master Roll has become less than
specified on “Stock Management”.
)p.163
Check Stock of
Required Master and
Please Order If Needed
Check the Original Size
The Original Size is larger
than Max. Printing Area
(Action)
Order Ink Cartridges or Master Rolls if
necessary.
(Symptom)
As the original size is larger than the
maximum printing area, extra areas may
not be printed.
(Symptom)
Reproduction size is too large for the
detected original size and exceeds the
maximum printing area.
(Action)
Modify the reproduction size.
234 When a Message Displays
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
(Action)
Place the original on the Glass Platen.
)p.81
(Action)
Modify the reproduction size.
Check the Settings
The Selected Reproduction
Ratio will not fit the
Max. Printing Area
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
• To change the “Size” setting;
Touch [Size Setting].
• When resuming the print job;
Touch [Continue].
(Alternatively, press the
key to
print.)
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
• When changing the “Size” setting;
Touch [Size Setting].
• When resuming the print job;
Touch [Continue].
(Alternatively, press the
key to
print.)
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
REG-ML_EN.book Page 235 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Close Platen Cover
If original moves
you may not get
desired result
Symptom/Action
(Symptom)
The Platen Cover was opened during
the editing process of the RISO Editor
function.
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
Touch [Close].
(Action)
Close the Platen Cover gently.
Enter Print Quantity Over [N], (Symptom)
Programed
You are trying to print fewer copies than
Minimum Value
previously specified on “Minimum Print
Quantity”.
Specify more than the displayed number
of copies and press the
key.
(Action)
Enter a larger number to print, or change
“Minimum Print Q’ty” on the Admin.
screen.
)p.163
Invalid Print Drum (Cylinder)
has been Selected
Change Drum (Cylinder), or
Reselect Drum (Cylinder)
Size
(Symptom)
You have selected a different Print Drum
(Cylinder) than the one currently in
place, as confirmed in the Confirm Drum
(Cylinder) Type screen when it was
installed.
(Action)
Select the type of Print Drum (Cylinder)
currently installed.
Alternatively, you can change the Print
Drum (Cylinder).
)p.215
!! Multi-Up is Not Available
with This Paper Size !!
Replace with Proper Paper
of Standard Size
(Symptom)
Multi-up functions cannot be used when
custom-sized paper is in the Paper Feed
Tray.
• When changing a setting;
In the Confirm Drum (Cylinder) Type
screen, select the type of Print Drum
(Cylinder) currently installed and
touch [OK].
• When installing a different Print
Drum (Cylinder);
Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
replace with the correct one.
When the Print Drum (Cylinder) is reinstalled, the Warning Message will
clear.
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
(Action)
Load standard-sized paper in the Paper
Feed Tray.
!! No Auto Reproduction
Size Selection with This
Combination of Original
and Printing Paper !!
Select Size Manually
(Symptom)
Auto Reproduction Size is less than
50% or more than 200%.
!! No Auto Reproduction
with This Original
and Printing Paper !!
Select Size Manually
(Symptom)
Auto reproduction is not available
because the size of the original could
not be detected.
(Action)
Modify the reproduction size.
(Action)
Set the reproduction-size manually.
• When changing the “Size” setting;
Touch [Size Setting].
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
• When changing the “Size” setting;
Touch [Size Setting].
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
When a Message Displays 235
REG-ML_EN.book Page 236 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Symptom/Action
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
No Master on Print Drum
(Cylinder)
Make a New Master
(Symptom)
Touch [Close].
You are attempting to print, but there is
no master on the Print Drum (Cylinder). Important!:
• Do not leave the Print Drum (Cylinder)
without a master. This dries out the
(Action)
drum (cylinder) and causes damage.
Set the original and create a master.
You must either create a master or
perform a “Confidential” operation to
wrap a master around the Print Drum
(Cylinder).
Original Size Exceeds
Limitation of Multi-Up
Specify Original Size
(Symptom)
“Multi-Up” is not available for the original
size.
(Action)
Specify the original size.
)p.69
Original Undetected
Reset Original
(Symptom)
The machine failed to detect the original
document. The original document may
not be placed.
(Action)
Re-position the original.
Page Format is Larger
than Paper Size
!! Possible Ink Smudges
on Prints !!
(Symptom)
The printing paper is smaller than the
Master.
(Action)
Use a correct size printer paper.
Page Format is Larger
than Paper Size
!! Possible Ink Smudges
on Prints !!
(Continue->PROOF Key)
(Symptom)
The printing paper is smaller than the
Master.
Please inform this message
to your administrator
Due date for
ID counter report
(Symptom)
Due date for ID Counter Report.
236 When a Message Displays
(Action)
Use a correct size printer paper.
(Action)
Report to your administrator.
)p.151
• When changing the “Original Size”
setting;
Touch [Original Size].
• When resuming the print job;
Touch [Continue].
(Alternatively, press the
key to print.)
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
Re-position the original to clear the PopUp Message.
• When resuming the print job;
Touch [Continue].
(Alternatively, press the
key to print.)
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
• When printing from the machine;
Touch [Continue].
(You can also print by pressing the
key.)
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(You can also stop by pressing the
key or the
key.)
• When printing from the machine;
Press the
key.
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(You can also stop by pressing the
key or the
key.)
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
REG-ML_EN.book Page 237 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Symptom/Action
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
Processing Print Data
from PC
This Function is Not
Available while Processing Current Data
(Symptom)
The machine is receiving the document
data from the computer.
While the data is being transmitted,
Scan mode is disabled.
(Action)
Initiate the Print job after the
transmission is complete, or print from
the machine.
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Reached to the limit count
Contact the administrator
(Symptom)
The upper limit for master-making/
printing set by the administrator was
reached.
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
(Action)
Contact your Administrator.
! Scanning is Not Possible !
External CI is not Connected
or Processing Connection
Check Cable Connection
(Symptom)
The scanning function is unavailable
due to a lost connection with an external
controller or because connection
processing has not finished.
(Action)
Check the connection with the external
controller.
Set Original
and Press Start Key
Re-scanning will be Started
to Add Image Processing
(Symptom)
No original is set on the machine to
rescan for image processing by the
RISO Editor.
(Action)
Set the original and scan again.
Starting Up Network Card
Please Wait a Moment
(Symptom)
RISO Network Card (Option) is starting
up.
(Action)
Please wait a moment.
Alternatively, print from the machine.
!! The Data Storage Area
has Become Full !!
Clear Old Storage Data
(Symptom)
Insufficient free area on the Document
Storage Card.
(Action)
Check the storage data and delete
unnecessary jobs.
• For checking the storage memory
Touch [Storage Memory].
When a Message Displays 237
REG-ML_EN.book Page 238 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Message
Symptom/Action
How to Clear a Pop-Up Message
!! The Number of Storage
Data has Become Full !!
Clear Old Storage Data in the
Selected Folder
(Symptom)
The selected folder is full.
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
(Action)
Check the folder and delete
unnecessary data. Or, select another
folder.
• For checking the storage memory
Touch [Storage Memory].
The file size is too large
to store on USB Flash Drive
Change the USB Flash Drive
or delete some files
to make spaces
(Symptom)
Insufficient free area on the USB Flash
Drive.
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
!!The Print Drum (Cylinder)
Type
has been Changed!!
Select the Current
Print Drum (Cylinder) Type
(Symptom)
A different type of Print Drum (Cylinder)
has been installed.
!! Unmatched Paper Size !!
Interposal Paper is Smaller
than Printing Paper
Check Interposal Paper Size
(Action)
Check the USB Flash Drive data and
delete unnecessary jobs.
(Action)
Select the type of Print Drum (Cylinder)
currently installed.
Alternatively, change back to the same
type of Print Drum (Cylinder) as before.
)p.215
(Symptom)
Interposal Papers are smaller than
paper size.
key or the
key or the
• For checking the USB Flash Drive
data
Touch [USB Job List].
• When changing a setting;
In the Confirm Drum (Cylinder) Type
screen, select the type of Print Drum
(Cylinder) currently installed and
touch [OK].
• When installing a different Print
Drum (Cylinder);
Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
replace with the same one as before.
When the Print Drum (Cylinder) is reinstalled, the Warning Message will clear.
Touch [Close].
(Alternatively, press the
key to clear.)
key or the
(Action)
Load Interposal Papers of appropriate
size in the tray.
!! Unmatched Size-Current Page and
Printing Paper !!
Check Paper Size
(Symptom)
The original data sent from the computer
does not match the print paper size.
(Action)
Check the print paper size and change
paper or size as needed.
238 When a Message Displays
• When resuming the print job;
Touch [Continue].
(Alternatively, press the
key to
print.)
• When stopping the print job;
Touch [Cancel].
(Alternatively, press the
key or
the
key to clear.)
REG-ML_EN.book Page 239 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Consumable Information Screen
In order to assure optimum printing, the machine acquires information from the consumables.
If acquired matching information is not proper, the Consumable Information Screen is shown.
Enter appropriate values.
The
icon on the Info Button will be grayed-out when this occurs.
)p.207
Note:
• Entering an inappropriate value does not affect usual operations but may result in bad print quality.
• When you perform the following operations, the values set on the “Consumables Information Input Wizard” screen
disappears and thus you need to enter the values again.
– After the power switch is set to
(OFF), the switch is set to
– After the machine is placed into the Sleep status.
– After the
key is pressed
(ON) again
Ink Information Input Screen
This screen pops up when data could not be obtained from the Ink Cartridge.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Image
Admin.
Ink
Cannot Get Consumables Info
Values Required
Line
Input
Dot
Process
Reservation
OK
Black
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idle
In fo
Touch [OK] and enter values as shown below.
Screen Display
Description
[H1] Ink Color (Colour) Setting
Select the same color (colour) as the Print
Drum (Cylinder) currently in use.
Values
1: Black 2: Color (Colour)
When a Message Displays 239
REG-ML_EN.book Page 240 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Screen Display
Description
Values
[H2] Print Density Fine Adjustment
Select a Print Density level to match the ink to
fine-tune print result.
1 (Light) - 5 (Dark)
[H3] First Print Density Adjustment
Select a Print Density level of the first print to
match the ink.
This can be selected independent of [H2] Print
Density Fine Adjustment setting.
1 (Light) - 5 (Dark)
A confirmation screen displays when done.
Press the
key to approve selection.
Returns to the Basic Screen.
Note:
• Master Information Input screen may also display. If so, enter Master Information as well.
)p.240
Master Information Input Screen
This screen pops up when data could not be obtained from the Master Roll.
Touch [OK] and enter values as shown below.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Image
Admin.
Master
Cannot Get Consumables Info
Values Required
Line
Input
Dot
Process
Black
Reservation
OK
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Idle
In fo
240 When a Message Displays
REG-ML_EN.book Page 241 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Screen Display
Description
Consumables Information Input Wizard
Master Information Input
Values
[H4] Master Density
Select the standard density to be applied
during creation of the master.
1 (Light) - 10 (Dark)
[H5] Print Density Fine Adjustment
Select a Print Density level to match the
master to fine-tune print result.
1 (Light) - 5 (Dark)
[H6] First Print Density Adjustment
Select a Print Density level of the first print to
match the master.
This can be selected independent of [H5] Print
Density Fine Adjustment.
1 (Light) - 5 (Dark)
H4 Master Density
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
8
9
10
Next>
Consumables Information Input Wizard
Master Information Input
H5 Print Density Fine Adjustment
1
2
3
4
<Back
5
Next>
Consumables Information Input Wizard
Master Information Input
H6 First Print Density Adjustment
1
2
3
4
<Back
5
Next>
A confirmation screen displays when done.
Consumables Information Input Wizard
Master Information Input
Confirm the input data shown below.
Press the START key if those set values are OK.
Item
Value
H4 Master Density
1
H5 Print Density Fine Adjustment
1
H6 First Print Density Adjustment
1
<Back
Press the
key to approve selection.
Returns to the Basic Screen.
When a Message Displays 241
REG-ML_EN.book Page 242 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If you run into a problem, consult the following chart first to find answers before calling for a repair.
Problem
The machine does not start up
when the power switch is
pressed.
Possible Cause
Action
You may have pressed the power
switch while the machine was in the
Sleep Mode.
Try pressing the power switch again.
Before pressing the power switch, you
may want to find out whether the machine
is indeed in the Sleep Mode, by checking
the indicator on the Control Panel. If the
key is lit, the machine is in sleep mode.
Press the
key to end sleep mode and to
activate the machine.
Power has been disconnected.
• Check the power cord for proper
connection to both the machine and the
power outlet.
• Check the power breaker.
The front cover is closed, but
the error message still does
not clear.
The Front Cover has not been firmly
closed.
Completely close the Front Cover. The
magnetic latch should properly engage.
The Paper Feed Tray cannot
be closed.
The Feed Paper Tray Guides have
not been widen up to the limit.
The power was turned off before the
Paper Feed Tray was lowered to the
bottom.
Turn the power on and lower the Paper
Feed Tray to the bottom. Set the Feed
Tray Paper Guide Lock Lever to
,
widen the Feed Tray Paper Guides up to
the limit, and close the Paper Feed Tray.
)p.32
The Print Drum (Cylinder) was
The Print Drum (Cylinder)
cannot be placed into position. stopped at an inappropriate position
after rotation.
After manually rotating the drum
(cylinder), make sure that the
mark and
the
mark meet as shown.
The Print Drum (Cylinder) has not
been correctly set to the guide.
242 Troubleshooting
Set the drum (cylinder) to the guide
correctly.
)p.217
REG-ML_EN.book Page 243 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
An error indication does not
disappear even though
consumables (ink, master roll)
are set.
Possible Cause
The consumables (ink, master roll)
have not been correctly set.
Action
After inserting the Ink Cartridge, turn it
clockwise ( ) to lock. Or set the Ink
Cartridge again.
)p.211
Set a master roll so that the
mark
comes to the left, and set the Master
Making Unit.
)p.208
The Master Disposal Box
cannot be removed.
There is no image on copies.
Some areas are missing in the
printed copy.
The Ink Cartridge does not contain
ink information.
Do not remove the label attached on the
Ink Cartridge outlet section. If you did so,
set a new Ink Cartridge.
)p.211
The master roll does not contain
master information.
Do not remove the
section from the
master core. If you did so, set a new
master roll.
)p.208
The “Protect” setting is ON.
If the “Protect” setting is ON, the Master
Disposal Box cannot usually be removed.
)p.174
The Master Disposal Box lever is
locked.
Slide the Master Disposal Box lever to the
right to unlock.
If the Master Disposal Box is padlocked,
contact the administrator to release the
padlock.
)p.213
The original is placed face up.
Place the original face down. (This is also
true for the ADF unit (Option))
The master is installed with the
incorrect side out.
Reinstall the Master Roll with correctly.
)p.208
The Glass Platen (and/or the ADF
Scanner Glass) is not clean.
Clean the Glass Platen (and/or the ADF
Scanner Glass).
)p.221
A foreign object may exist on the
master.
Pull out the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
check if any object exists on the master. If
a foreign object exists between the master
and the drum (cylinder), remove the
master. Then set the drum (cylinder) and
perform the master-making operation
again.
• The paper size placed on the
Paper Feed Tray was not the same
as the size of the original at the
time of the master-making process.
• The Feed Tray Paper Guides were
not fit to the width of paper at the
time of the master-making process.
A master is made according to the size of
paper placed on the Paper Feed Tray;
namely the width of the Feed Tray Paper
Guides and the length of paper. If the size
of paper placed on the tray is smaller than
the size of the original, a master is not
made for the entire original. Set the same
size of paper on the tray as the original
and perform the master-making operation.
Troubleshooting 243
REG-ML_EN.book Page 244 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Action
Vertical blank lines are found
on printed copies.
The Thermal Print Head of the Master
Making Unit or the Scanner Glass of
ADF unit (Option) has been stained
with dirt, white-out, etc.
Gently wipe the Thermal Print Head or
Scanner Glass with a soft cloth.
)p.221
The unwanted background of
an original is picked up on
copies.
If newspaper or colored (coloured)
paper is used as an original, the
background is picked up on copies.
Lighten the “Contrast” and create a new
master.
)p.58
Dirt is found on printed copies. The Glass Platen (and/or the ADF
Scanner Glass) is not clean.
Clean the Glass Platen (and/or the ADF
Scanner Glass).
)p.221
The edges of printed copies
are smudged with ink.
Because a master was made according to
a larger size than the original, the edges of
the original were processed as shadows.
Set the same size of paper as the original
and perform the master-making operation
again. Or attach tape as described below
to solve the problem.
Larger size of paper than the original
was placed on the Paper Feed Tray
at the time of the master-making
process.
Did you use [Max. Scan] setting
when making the master?
When printing thick paper such as
cards, corners of the paper contacted
and damaged the master.
244 Troubleshooting
Make another master and print with the
new master. Or pull out the Print Drum
(Cylinder) and attach cellophane tape to
the damaged section on the master.
However, if attached with cellophane tape,
a master may not been properly sent to
the Master Disposal Box.
REG-ML_EN.book Page 245 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Action
The back of the printed paper
is smudged with ink
The Pressure Roller has been stained
with ink.
Remove the Print Drum (Cylinder) and
clean the Pressure Roller.
)p.222
If the print position is outside the print
paper, this may cause the Pressure Roller
to be stained with ink.
Be careful when changing the size of print
paper or shifting the print position.
The Feed Tray Paper Guides were
not fit to the width of paper at the time
of the master-making process.
Adjust the Feed Tray Paper Guides to the
width of the paper.
If the Feed Tray Paper Guides are set
wider than the width of the paper, a master
will become wider than necessary.
)p.32
Are you using a paper that does not
efficiently absorb ink?
The ink did not dry fast enough, marking
onto the reverse side of the next paper.
Either change the paper or try “Ink Saving”
or “Interval” features.
)p.68
)p.97
If the machine is not used for an
extended period of time, ink on the
surface of the Print Drum (Cylinder)
may dry. This results in faint or
blurred printing just after printing is
started.
The ink on the Print Drum (Cylinder) will
dry when the machine is not in use for an
extended period. Printing with dried ink will
produce light or faded copies.
Press the
key and make several
copies before making copies to be actually
used. Or use the “Idling Action”.
)p.143
Faint originals result in faint images.
Increase the scanning level and perform
the master-making operation again.
)p.58
For originals written with a pencil, select
the Pencil mode.
)p.56
If the temperature is low (below 15°C
(59°F)) in a place where the machine
is installed or Ink Cartridges are
stored, ink does not flow smoothly.
Use the machine after keeping it at room
temperature for a while.
)p.11
The Ink Saving mode has been set.
With the “Ink Saving” mode selected, the
ink on printed copies is fainter than usual.
)p.68
Printed images are faint.
Printed texts are blurred.
Troubleshooting 245
REG-ML_EN.book Page 246 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Action
Did you place the second original in
time after the beep, while the
message “Place Another Original and
Press Start Key” was showing?
When you print using “Multi-Up”, the
machine will beep during the Multi-Up
Interval. Place the second original during
that interval.
If the machine starts scanning for the second
time without a beep, even when you are
scanning from the Glass Platen, you will
need to adjust “Multi-Up Interval” settings on
the Admin. screen.
)p.161
Did you accidentally press the
key while the original was being
scanned?
The print operation will stop if the
key
is pressed while scanning is in progress.
Do not press the
key until all originals
have been scanned.
The left and right print
positions have been shifted.
The left and right print positions have
not been adjusted for the center.
The Paper Feed Tray is equipped with the
Horizontal Print Position Adjustment Dial.
Lower the tray, adjust the position, and then
perform proof copy to check the position.
)p.94
Paper sticks to the surface of
the Print Drum (Cylinder).
The margin at the top of the original or
print is too small.
The margin of the original (top of the print in the
paper output direction) must be 5 mm (3/16") at
least. Lower the vertical print position. If this
adjustment is impossible, reproduce an original
with enough margin and perform the mastermaking operation again.
)p.59
The print paper is inappropriate.
Use the recommended paper.
)p.15
The original has a solid black portion
at its top.
If an original has a solid black portion at
the top, printed copies may not properly
output. Replace the original in the reverse
direction and restart the master-making
process.
Printed and curled copies are
output.
The print paper is loaded at a
horizontal grain direction.
Load print paper with a vertical grain
direction.
Paper gets jammed in the ADF
unit (Option).
There is any paper caught in the ADF
unit (Option).
Pull the ADF Original Release Lever to the
right or turn the Release Original Dial and
remove the jammed paper.
Multi-up did not function.
There is nothing printed on
one side.
ADF Original Release Lever
Original Release Dial
246 Troubleshooting
REG-ML_EN.book Page 247 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Action
Printed copies are not neatly
aligned in the Paper Receiving
Tray.
The positions of the Receiving Tray
Paper Guides and the Paper Stopper
are inappropriate.
Adjust the Receiving Tray Paper Guides
and the Paper Stopper to the size of
paper. For thick paper, slightly widen them
as necessary.
If you have adjusted the horizontal position
on the Paper Feed Tray, shift the Receiving
Tray Paper Guides in the same direction.
)p.35
The positions of the Paper Jumping
Wings are inappropriate.
Position the Paper Jumping Wings
according to the size and thickness of
paper. )p.98
The Paper Arrangers are not properly
set.
Set the Paper Arrangers properly.
)p.35
The Paper Feed Pressure
Adjustment Lever is positioned
incorrectly.
If the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment
Lever is set to “CARD (
)”, printed
copies may not be correctly aligned when
using standard paper.
Set the Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment
Lever to “NORMAL (
)”.
)p.33
Paper goes over the receiving
tray stopper.
---
Follow the steps to level the receiving tray
as follows:
1) Fold the Receiving Tray Paper
Guides/Stopper.
2) Lift up the sides of the receiving tray
with both hands, and move the
receiving tray shaft to the position B.
Position A is recommended in most cases.
A
B
A: Ordinary position
B: Move to this position when paper
goes over the tray.
Troubleshooting 247
REG-ML_EN.book Page 248 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Paper is not smoothly fed from
the Paper Feed Tray.
(skipped paper, or multiplesheet feeding)
Possible Cause
Action
The print paper is inappropriate.
Use paper that falls within the
recommended range.
)p.15
The position of the Paper Feed
Pressure Adjustment Lever was
inappropriate.
When using thick or slippery paper, set the
Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever to
CARD (
).
)p.33
The angle of the Stripper Plate is
inappropriate.
Turn the Stripper Plate Angle Adjustment
dial as follows;
• When the feeding skips
Turn the dial to the left.
• When multiple sheets are fed
Turn the dial to the right.
Important!:
• Before making the adjustment, be sure
to remove all paper from the Paper
Feed Tray and confirm that the tray has
lowered to the bottom.
The Paper Feed Adjustment on the
Functions screen is not properly set.
Adjust the “Paper Feed Adj.”. Contact your
dealer (or authorized service
representative) for details on making the
adjustment.
The back of the printed card is
peeling, or the leading edge
gets wrinkled.
The angle of the Stripper Plate is in
appropriate
Turn the Stripper Plate Angle Adjustment
Dial to adjust the angle.
An error message displays
even though there is no paper
jam.
Is the lifted paper getting ejected at
the second rotation of the Print Drum
(Cylinder)?
Check the printed copy, and if the top
margin is less than 5 mm (3/16"), slightly
lower Print Position.
Is sunlight directly hitting the
machine?
The sensor is affected by direct sunlight.
Install shades or curtains, or move the
machine out of direct sunlight.
248 Troubleshooting
REG-ML_EN.book Page 249 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Action
When printing a multiple page
computer file, the machine
repeats the master-making
process one page at a time.
Is “Collate” option selected in the
Printer Driver?
Delete the current print job. Deselect
“Collate”, and resend the data to the
machine.
See )p.46, step 3.
)p.52
The computer sent the file, but
it was not received by the
machine.
Is the Admin. screen currently
showing on the display?
Touch
and switch to the Basic Screen
from the Admin. screen.
The
Received data is waiting for output?
Press the
key is blinking.
key and proceed to print.
Troubleshooting 249
REG-ML_EN.book Page 250 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Appendix
Optional Accessories
A variety of optional accessories are available to enhance the capabilities of the machine.
For details about the optional accessories, see your dealer (or authorized service representative).
‹ Auto Document Feeder AF-VI
Feed up to 50 sheets of originals automatically.
‹ Color Drum (Cylinder)
Simply change the Drum (Cylinder) to print in multiple colors (colours). (Case included)
‹ A4 (Letter) Drum (Cylinder) W
A special drum (cylinder) for A4 or Letter size landscape paper. (Case included)
‹ Wide Stacking Tray
This unit can take paper up to 340 mm × 555 mm (133/8" × 2127/32") in size.
‹ Key Card Counter
With a single button press, shows the numbers of printed copies and consumed masters within a given period of
time. This can help you manage costs.
‹ Job Separator
With the Programed Printing function, allows the machine to print and sort into groups separated by tape.
‹ Document Storage Card DM-128CF / Document Storage Card DM-512CF
A Storage Card for using the Storage Memory function.
‹ Card Feed kit
This unit allows you to feed thicker paper such as cards.
‹ Envelope Feed Kit
This unit allows you to feed envelopes.
‹ Stand
‹ Ink/Master Holder
A rack kit for storing supply such as ink and masters.
‹ RISO Network Card
Use to directly connect the machine to the network.
This comes with the RISO-MONITOR software that allows you to check the status of the machine from computers.
‹ RISO Controller IS300
A custom controller enabling the machine to be used as a network-connected PostScript 3 printer.
250 Optional Accessories
REG-ML_EN.book Page 251 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Appendix
Specifications
RISO EZ591
Master-making/printing methods
Original Type
Original Size (max./min.)
Original Paper Weight
Print Paper Size (max./min.)
Paper Supply Capacity
Print Paper Weight
Image Processing mode
Master-making Time
Printing Area (max.)
Print Reproduction Ratio
Print Speed
Print Position Adjustment
Ink Supply
Master Supply/Disposal
Master Disposal Capacity
User Interface
Optional Accessories
Power Source
Dimensions
Weight
Safety Standard
High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing
Book (10 kg (22 lb) or less), sheet
When using the Glass Platen :
50 mm × 90 mm (131/32" × 39/16") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
When using the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI :
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
When using the Glass Platen : 10 kg (22 lb) or less
When using the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI :
50 g/m2 (13-lb bond) - 128 g/m2 (34-lb bond)
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
1000 sheets (64 g/m2 (17-lb bond))
46 g/m2 (12-lb bond) - 210 g/m2 (110-lb index)
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo (Line/Photo/Shadow off),
Pencil (Darker/Lighter)
Approx. 20 seconds (for A4/landscape/100% reproduction ratio)
291 mm × 425 mm (117/16" × 163/4")
Zoom : 50 - 200%
Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 200%, 154%, 129%, 121%
Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 78%, 65%, 61%, 50%
Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Approx. 60 - 130 pages per minute (five steps variable)
Vertical : ±15 mm (±19/32") Horizontal : ±10 mm (±3/8")
Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Full automatic (approx. 215 sheets per roll)
100 sheets
LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Auto Document Feeder AF-VI, Color Drum (Cylinder), A4 (Letter) Drum
(Cylinder) W, Wide Stacking Tray, Key Card Counter, Job Separator,
Document Storage Card, Card Feed kit, Envelope Feed Kit, Stand, Ink/
Master Holder, RISO Network Card
EZ591U : 100-120/220-240V~, 50-60Hz, 3.4A/1.6A
When in use :
1415 mm(W) × 655 mm(D) × 665 mm(H) (5523/32"(W) × 2525/32"(D) ×
263/16"(H))
When in storage :
780 mm(W) × 655 mm(D) × 665 mm(H) (3023/32"(W) × 2525/32"(D) ×
263/16"(H))
Approx. 103 kg (227 lb)
IEC-60950-1 compliant, Indoor, pollution degree 2*1, At altitudes of 2000m
or lower
Note:
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual
may not correspond to your machine.
• The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
*1 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air. Degree “2” corresponds to a general
indoor environment.
Specifications 251
REG-ML_EN.book Page 252 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Appendix
RISO EZ571
Master-making/printing methods
High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing
Original Type
Book (10 kg (22 lb) or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.)
When using the Glass Platen :
50 mm × 90 mm (131/32" × 39/16") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
When using the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI :
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
Original Paper Weight
When using the Glass Platen : 10 kg (22 lb) or less
When using the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI :
50 g/m2 (13-lb bond) - 128 g/m2 (34-lb bond)
Print Paper Size (max./min.)
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
Paper Supply Capacity
1000 sheets (64 g/m2 (17-lb bond))
Print Paper Weight
46g/m2 (12-lb bond) - 210g/m2 (110-lb index)
Image Processing mode
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo (Line/Photo/Shadow off),
Pencil (Darker/Lighter)
Master-making Time
Approx. 20 seconds (for A4/landscape/100% reproduction ratio)
Printing Area (max.)
291 mm × 413 mm (117/16" × 161/4")
Print Reproduction Ratio
Zoom : 50 - 200%
Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 163%, 141%, 122%, 116%
Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 87%, 82%, 71%, 61%
Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Speed
Approx. 60 - 130 pages per minute (five steps variable)
Print Position Adjustment
Vertical : ±15 mm (±19/32") Horizontal : ±10 mm (±3/8")
Ink Supply
Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Master Supply/Disposal
Full automatic (approx. 220 sheets per roll)
Master Disposal Capacity
100 sheets
User Interface
LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Optional Accessories
Auto Document Feeder AF-VI, Color Drum (Cylinder), A4 (Letter) Drum
(Cylinder) W, Wide Stacking Tray, Key Card Counter, Job Separator,
Document Storage Card, Card Feed kit, Envelope Feed Kit, Stand, Ink/
Master Holder, RISO Network Card
Power Source
EZ571E: 220-240V~,50-60Hz, 1.6A
EZ571A (For Korea): 220V~,60Hz, 1.6A
EZ571A (For Taiwan): 110V~,60Hz, 3.4A
EZ571A (For other countries): 220-240V~,50-60Hz, 1.6A
Dimensions
When in use :
1415 mm(W) × 655 mm(D) × 665 mm(H) (5523/32"(W) × 2525/32"(D) ×
263/16"(H))
When in storage :
780 mm(W) × 655 mm(D) × 665 mm(H) (3023/32"(W) × 2525/32"(D) ×
263/16"(H))
Weight
Approx. 103 kg (227 lb)
Safety Standard
IEC-60950-1 compliant, Indoor, pollution degree 2*1, At altitudes of 2000m or lower
Note:
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual
may not correspond to your machine.
• The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
*1 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air. Degree “2” corresponds to a general
indoor environment.
252 Specifications
REG-ML_EN.book Page 253 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Appendix
RISO EZ531
Master-making/printing methods
High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing
Original Type
Book (10 kg (22 lb) or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.)
When using the Glass Platen :
50 mm × 90 mm (131/32" × 39/16") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
When using the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI :
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
Original Paper Weight
When using the Glass Platen : 10 kg (22 lb) or less
When using the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI :
50 g/m2 (13-lb bond) - 128 g/m2 (34-lb bond)
Print Paper Size (max./min.)
100 mm × 148 mm (315/16" × 527/32") - 310 mm × 432 mm (123/16" × 17")
Paper Supply Capacity
1000 sheets (64 g/m2 (17-lb bond))
Print Paper Weight
46g/m2 (12-lb bond) - 210g/m2 (110-lb index)
Image Processing mode
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo (Line/Photo/Shadow off),
Pencil (Darker/Lighter)
Master-making Time
Approx. 20 seconds (for A4/landscape/100% reproduction ratio)
Printing Area (max.)
251 mm × 357 mm (97/8" × 141/16")
Print Reproduction Ratio
Zoom : 50 - 200%
Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 163%, 141%, 122%, 116%
Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 87%, 82%, 71%, 61%
Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Speed
Approx. 60 - 130 pages per minute (five steps variable)
Print Position Adjustment
Vertical : ±15 mm (±19/32") Horizontal : ±10 mm (±3/8")
Ink Supply
Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Master Supply/Disposal
Full automatic (approx. 250 sheets per roll)
Master Disposal Capacity
100 sheets
User Interface
LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Optional Accessories
Auto Document Feeder AF-VI, Color Drum (Cylinder), A4 (Letter) Drum
(Cylinder) W, Wide Stacking Tray, Key Card Counter, Job Separator,
Document Storage Card, Card Feed kit, Envelope Feed Kit, Stand, Ink/
Master Holder, RISO Network Card
Power Source
EZ531A: 220V~, 60Hz, 1.6A
Dimensions
When in use :
1415 mm(W) × 655 mm(D) × 665 mm(H) (5523/32"(W) × 2525/32"(D) ×
263/16"(H))
When in storage :
780 mm(W) × 655 mm(D) × 665 mm(H) (3023/32"(W) × 2525/32"(D) ×
263/16"(H))
Weight
Approx. 103 kg (227 lb)
Safety Standard
IEC-60950-1 compliant, Indoor, pollution degree 2*1, At altitudes of 2000m
or lower
Note:
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual
may not correspond to your machine.
• The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
*1 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air. Degree “2” corresponds to a general
indoor environment.
Specifications 253
REG-ML_EN.book Page 254 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Index
Symbols
* Key ....................................................................... 22
+ Key ...................................................................... 22
× Key ...................................................................... 22
Numerics
2 Up ............................................................69, 70, 74
A
A4 (Letter) Drum (Cylinder) W ............................ 250
Adding Paper ......................................................... 34
ADF Original Guide ............................................... 20
ADF Original Receiving Tray ................................ 20
ADF Original Release Dial .................................. 230
ADF Original Release Lever .........................20, 230
ADF Semi-Auto ............................................147, 159
ADF unit ...........................................17, 20, 147, 222
Admin. .................................................................. 157
Admin. Screen ....................................................... 25
Advanced Features ............................................. 106
Appendix .............................................................. 250
Auto ........................................................................ 60
Auto Clear ............................................................ 161
Auto Document Feeder ......................................... 20
Auto Document Feeder AF-VI ............................ 250
Auto Idling ......................................................42, 163
Auto Page Renewal ............................144, 146, 163
Auto Power-OFF .................................................. 162
Auto Print .........................................................30, 54
Auto Process Mode ............................................. 159
Auto Process OFF ................................................. 54
Auto Sleep ........................................................... 162
Auto-Link Function .............................................. 192
Auto-Process ...................................................45, 64
Auto-Process Indicator .......................................... 64
Auto-Process Key ............................................23, 64
Auto-process “OFF” .............................................. 47
B
Base IP Address .................................................. 161
Basic Process ........................................................ 31
Basic Screen Layout ............................................. 29
Beep Sound ......................................................... 163
Blocked .................................................................. 29
Book Shadow ......................................................... 81
Buttons on Touch Screen ...................................... 30
C
C Key ...................................................................... 22
Cancel Job ........................................................... 125
Card Feed Kit ....................................................... 250
Center Position Indicator ...................................... 94
Changing Administrator/User Registration ........ 119
Changing Output Directions ................................. 52
Changing Special Paper Ctrl setting .................. 103
Changing Stored Program .................................. 133
254
Changing the Data Order ....................................185
Changing the Owner Name ................................181
Checking Remaining Consumable Amount .......206
CI Select ...............................................................160
Cleaning ...............................................................220
Clear All ..................................................... 30, 52, 53
Clearing All User Counters ..................................122
Clearing Job Memory ..........................................140
Clearing Program .................................................132
Clearing Special Paper Ctrl setting .....................104
Clearing User Registration ..................................120
Clock/Calendar ....................................................161
Closing the Paper Feed Tray ................................34
Closing the Paper Receiving Tray ........................36
Color Drum (Cylinder) ................................. 215, 250
Computer Connection ............................................13
Confidential ..........................................................141
Configurable Functions .............................. 157, 200
Connection Method ...............................................13
Connector .............................................................216
Consumable Errors ..................................... 224, 227
Consumable Information Screen ........................239
Consumables ................................................ 12, 206
Contrast ..................................................................58
Contrast Adj ............................................................66
Control Panel .................................................. 20, 22
Copying Stored Data ...........................................189
Counter ...................................................................21
Counter Report ....................................................152
Create User ................................................. 108, 162
Custom Paper Entry ................................... 160, 170
Custom-Sized Paper ............................ 63, 170, 172
D
Data Information ..................................................180
Data Order ............................................................185
Data-Map ................................................................29
Default Folder .......................................................160
Default Settings ........................................... 157, 165
Density (print density) ............................................93
Direct Access .......................................................168
Direct Access Area ....................................... 29, 168
Direct Access Entry .................................... 157, 168
Direct Print ..............................................................44
Disable ..................................................................118
Disabling User identification Access ..................118
Display ....................................................... 20, 22, 24
Display Adjustment ..............................................158
Display Language ................................................158
Display Priority .....................................................157
Disposing of Consumables .................................218
Document Storage Card ......................................250
Dot Process ............................................................65
Duo .........................................................................56
Duo (Line) ...............................................................56
REG-ML_EN.book Page 255 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Index
Duo (Photo) ............................................................ 56
Duo (Shadow off) ................................................... 56
Duplex Interval ..................................................... 164
Duplex Printing .................................................... 202
E
ECO mode ........................................................... 162
E-mail ................................................................... 151
Energy Saving Mode ........................................... 162
Enlarging/reducing ................................................ 75
Enlarging/Reducing Originals ............................... 59
Entering Master Information ............................... 240
Entering sizes and changing names .................. 170
Entering the User Name ..................................... 115
Envelope Feed Kit ............................................... 250
Error ........................................................................ 29
Error Messages ................................................... 224
Ex. Reserve Period .....................................142, 161
Extended Paper ................................................... 171
External CI Info .................................................... 161
F
Feed Tray Ascent/Descent Button ...........20, 34, 95
Feed Tray Paper Guides .................................20, 32
Fixed Scan Size ................................................... 160
Flanges ................................................................ 209
Folder Renaming ................................................. 160
Format .................................................................. 182
Free ..................................................................59, 61
Front Cover ............................................................ 21
Function and Name of Each Part ......................... 20
Functions Area ...................................................... 29
Functions Descriptions ............................................ 9
Functions Screen .................................................. 25
G
Gauge Cover ......................................................... 37
Glass Platen ......................................17, 20, 37, 221
Go to Next ............................................................ 125
Group ...........................................................116, 123
H
High/Full Management ................................106, 107
Horizontal (Left/Right) Adjustment ....................... 95
Horizontal Print Position Adjustment Dial ......20, 95
Humidity range ...................................................... 11
I
i Information ...................................................29, 207
Icons Used in This Manual ..................................... 8
ID Counter Report ............................................... 151
ID Print ................................................................... 48
ID Print Job .......................................................... 183
Idle .......................................................................... 29
Idling Action ......................................................... 143
Image ..................................................................... 56
Image Processing ..........................................56, 159
Initial Screen ..........................................................24
Ink ................................................................ 211, 218
Ink Cartridge .......................................... 21, 211, 218
Ink Cartridge Cap Holder ............................. 21, 212
Ink Handling ...........................................................12
Ink Information Input ............................................239
Ink Saving ...............................................................68
Ink/Master Holder ................................................250
Installation ..............................................................10
Installation Errors ........................................ 224, 228
Installation location ................................................10
Installing the Print Drum (Cylinder) .....................217
Interval ....................................................................97
J
Job ..........................................................................30
Job list display ......................................................158
Job List Screen ......................................................48
Job Memory ......................... 134, 135, 136, 138, 140
Job Operation Area ...............................................30
Job Properties Area ...............................................30
Job Separation .....................................................159
Job Separator .............................................. 125, 250
Jump Wing Control ................................. 98, 99, 160
K
Key Card Counter ................................................250
L
Limit ......................................................................117
Line .........................................................................56
Link Basic Screen ................................................199
Link Info Refresh ..................................................164
Link Mode ...............................................................27
Link Mode Function .............................................192
Link Properties ............................................ 164, 193
Link Scanning Mode ............................................164
Linked Printer .............................................. 164, 192
Linked Printer Setup List .....................................194
Link-Free Volume .................................................164
Location of Caution Label .....................................12
Log out Key ............................................................23
Low/Admin tab only .................................... 106, 107
M
Machine Handling ..................................................11
Maintenance .........................................................220
Maintenance Call .................................................232
Malfunctions .........................................................242
Management Level ..................... 106, 107, 111, 162
Margin .............................................................. 18, 73
Margin+ ............................................................ 59, 60
Margin-Plus Rate .................................................161
Master ...................................................................219
Master core ................................................. 209, 218
Master Disposal Box ..................................... 20, 213
Master Disposal Box Handle ...............................213
255
REG-ML_EN.book Page 256 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Index
Master Disposal Box Lever ................................. 213
Master Guide Flap .........................................21, 209
Master Information Input ..................................... 240
Master Jam Errors .......................................224, 225
Master Making Unit .......................................21, 208
Master Making Unit Cover ............................21, 208
Master Making Unit Cover Lever ........................ 208
Master Making Unit Handle ..........................21, 208
Master Making Unit Release Button ............21, 208
Master Removal Hook ................................222, 231
Master Replacement ........................................... 208
Master Roll ............................................................. 21
Master Roll Holder .........................................21, 209
Master-Making Key ............................................... 23
Materials Not to Be Printed ................................... 18
Max. Scan .............................................................. 90
Maximum Printing Areas ....................................... 18
Message ............................................................... 224
message area ...................................................... 143
Meter Display ....................................................... 149
Metric/Inch Switch ............................................... 158
Mid/ID Print Only .........................................106, 107
Minimum Print Q’ty .............................................. 163
MODE Key ............................................................. 22
Mode Key Pattern ................................................ 157
Monthly Reminder ............................................... 153
Moving Stored Data ............................................. 189
Multi-Page Mode .........................................124, 127
Multiple-Original ..................................................... 69
Multi-Up function .................................................... 69
Multi-Up Interval ............................................73, 161
Multi-Up Print .............................................69, 70, 76
Multi-Up Tickets .........................................69, 72, 78
My Counter .......................................................... 206
My Direct Access ................................................. 155
N
Next Page ............................................................ 125
Non-ID Print ......................................................... 184
O
Online Auto-Link .................................................. 164
OP Auto Process ................................................. 159
Operation Environment ......................................... 11
Operation flow of User Management ................. 108
Operation Safety Guide ........................................ 11
Operational Instructions .......................................... 9
Option ................................................................... 250
Optional Device Area ............................................ 30
Optional Device Errors ................................224, 226
Optional Functions (Linked Printer) ................... 199
Orientation of Print Paper ..................................... 73
Original ................................................................... 17
Original Margin ...................................................... 18
Original Orientation and Print Results .................. 70
Original Scan Density ............................................ 58
256
Overlay .................................................................187
Overlaying Stored Data .......................................188
Owner Name ........................................................181
owner name ..........................................................180
P
P Key ......................................................................22
Page Orientation ..................................................164
Paper ......................................................................63
Paper Arranger ......................................... 21, 35, 36
Paper Button ..........................................................30
Paper Eject Adj. .....................................................98
Paper Ejection Adj ...............................................160
Paper Feed Adj. .....................................................98
Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever ....... 20, 33
Paper Feed Tray ............................................. 20, 32
Paper Jam Errors ........................................ 224, 230
Paper Jumping Wing ...................................... 21, 98
Paper Receiving Tray ............................... 21, 35, 36
Paper Recommendations ......................................15
Paper Size ............................................................197
Paper Stopper ........................................... 21, 35, 36
Pause ......................................................................29
Pause before “Master” ...........................................46
Pause before “Print” ..............................................47
Pencil ......................................................................56
Pencil (Darker) .......................................................56
Pencil (Lighter) .......................................................56
Photo ......................................................................56
Photo Contrast .......................................................66
Photo Gradation .....................................................67
Photo (Group) ........................................................56
Photo (Portrait) .......................................................56
Photo (Standard) ....................................................56
PIN code ...................................... 107, 109, 113, 165
PIN code Input Screen ................................... 28, 43
Platen Cover ..........................................................20
Platen Cover Pad .......................................... 20, 221
Pop-Up Message .................................................232
Power connection ..................................................10
Power Switch .................................................. 21, 32
Power-OFF Schedule ..........................................162
Pressure Roller ....................................................222
Preview ...................................................... 30, 52, 87
Print .......................................................................151
Print Colors (Colours) ..........................................164
Print Density ............................................ 22, 93, 159
Print Density Adjustment .......................................93
Print Density Adjustment Indicator ................ 22, 93
Print Density Adjustment Keys ...................... 22, 93
Print Drum (Cylinder) ............................ 21, 215, 217
Print Drum (Cylinder) Handle ....................... 21, 215
Print Drum (Cylinder) Release Button ......... 21, 215
Print Drum (Cylinder) Replacement ...................215
Print Key .................................................................23
Print Paper .............................................................15
REG-ML_EN.book Page 257 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Index
Print Paper Handling ............................................. 16
Print Paper Setting ................................................ 32
Print Position .......................................................... 22
Print Position Adjustment ................................22, 94
Print Position Center Key ...................................... 94
Print Quantity Display ......................................22, 96
Print Quantity Keys (0 to 9 Keys) ......................... 22
Print Speed ..............................................22, 92, 159
Print Speed Adjustment ........................................ 92
Print Speed Adjustment Indicator ...................22, 92
Print Speed Adjustment Keys .........................22, 92
Printer Exterior ..................................................... 223
Printing from Computer .............................30, 31, 44
Printing from Paper Document .................29, 31, 39
Program ...................... 123, 128, 129, 131, 132, 133
Program Print ...............................................125, 126
Progress Arrows .................................................... 23
Proof ....................................................................... 96
Proof copy .............................................................. 96
Proof Key .........................................................23, 96
Protect ..................................................162, 173, 174
Push Out Lever .................................................... 213
R
Receiving Tray Paper Guides ...................21, 35, 36
Recognition and Identification System ............... 109
Recognition Screen .........................................28, 43
Recognized by .....................107, 109, 113, 162, 165
Registering Administrator/Users ........................ 112
Reminder Date .................................................... 151
Removing the Print Drum (Cylinder) .................. 215
Rename ........................................................115, 129
Rename Group ....................................108, 121, 162
Rename screen ................................................... 130
Renaming a Job Memory .................................... 136
Renaming a Program .......................................... 129
Renew Page ....................................30, 52, 125, 144
Replacing Batteries .....................................225, 232
Replacing Consumables ..................................... 206
Replacing Paper .................................................... 34
Reproduction Size ............................................... 159
Reservation .......................................................... 142
Reserve Period .................................................... 161
Reset Counter ......................................108, 122, 162
Reset Key .............................................................. 23
Retrieving a Job Memory .................................... 138
Retrieving a Program .......................................... 131
Retrieving Special Paper Ctrl .............................. 102
Retrieving Stored Data ........................................ 183
RISO Controller IS300 ........................................ 250
RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER ............................ 14
RISO Network Card ............................................ 250
RISO Print .............................................................. 26
RISO Printer Driver ............................................... 14
RISO USB PRINT MANAGER ............................. 14
RISO Utility Software ............................................ 14
Rotate .......................................................... 145, 150
S
Safety Guide ..........................................................10
Saving Programs .................................................128
Saving Special Paper Ctrl ...................................100
Scan Mode .................................................... 27, 178
Scanner Glass ......................................................222
Scanning Contrast ........................................ 58, 159
Selections .............................................................168
Selections Entry .......................................... 157, 168
Selections Screen ................................................168
Selections Tab ......................................................168
Semi-Auto (Master) ................................................54
Semi-Auto (Print) ...................................................54
Separation Hook ......................................... 222, 231
Service Call Errors ...................................... 224, 225
Setting Data Information ......................................180
Setting the Group to assign ................................116
Setting the Management Level ...........................111
Setting the Paper Receiving Tray .........................35
Setting the User’s Usage ....................................117
Setting Up for Programed Printing ......................126
Setting Up the Monthly Reminder .......................153
Side Margin ............................................................85
Single Page Mode ...................................... 123, 126
Single-Original ........................................................69
Size and Weight Restrictions ......................... 15, 17
Skip Page ........................................................ 30, 52
Software Installation ..............................................14
Special Paper Ctrl ................. 98, 100, 102, 103, 104
Specifications .......................................................251
Specifying Stored Size .........................................182
Speed (print speed) ...............................................92
Stabilizer .................................................................21
Stand .....................................................................250
Standard Ratio ................................................ 59, 60
Start Key .................................................................23
Start-Up Screen ............................................ 24, 158
Status Area ...................................................... 29, 30
Stock Management ..............................................163
Stop Key .................................................................23
Stop Timing ..................................................... 45, 54
Storage Memory ...................................................183
Storage Retrieve Screen .....................................186
Storing Environment ..............................................16
Storing Job Memory .............................................135
Storing Original Data ...........................................176
Sub Tool Bar .........................................................164
T
Tab Area .......................................................... 29, 30
Temperature range ................................................11
Text and Photo (Image Processing mode) ...........56
Text (Image Processing mode) .............................56
The Screens and their Various Stages .................24
257
REG-ML_EN.book Page 258 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
Index
Thermal Print Head .......................................21, 221
Tips for Better Paper Feeding .............................. 16
Tone Curve ............................................................. 67
Tool Bar Position .................................................. 164
Top Margin ............................................................. 83
Troubleshooting ...........................................224, 242
U
Usage Status ....................................................... 149
USB Flash Drive ........... 12, 107, 109, 113, 151, 165
USB Flash Drive Screen .................................28, 43
USB Job List ............................................44, 49, 183
USB Job List Retrieve Screen ............................ 186
USB slot ...........................................................21, 49
User Counter ....................................................... 122
User identification access ...........................107, 118
User Management .......................................106, 162
User Name ........................................................... 115
User Registration Number (ID) ........................... 112
User’s Usage ....................................................... 117
V
Vertical Print Position Adjustment Keys .........22, 94
Vertical (Up/Down) Adjustment ............................ 94
W
WAKE-UP Key ...........................................23, 39, 49
Warning Messages .............................................. 233
White Roller ......................................................... 222
Wide Stacking Tray ............................................. 250
Z
Zoom ................................................................59, 62
258
REG-ML_EN.book Page 259 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
To Administrator
Canceling the Protect Setting
Cancellation of the “Protect” setting should be always done by the administrator.
Important!:
• To attach more importance to security, cut out this page, which should be stored by the administrator.
1
Touch [Admin.] on the Basic Screen
for each mode.
3
Touch [Protect].
Admin.
Ready to Make Master
Basic
Page(A4)
Selections
Contrast
Functions
Size
Admin.
Paper
Auto
Line
Dot
Process
A4
Reservation
Black
2
Multi-Up
Print
Editor
Id l e
In fo
All
Auto Clear
5mn
Display
Energy Saving Mode
5mn
Default
Power-OFF Schedule
OFF
System
User Management
Link Mode
Protect
Editor
OFF
P .3 / 4
After displaying the message “Please Wait a
Moment”, the protect setting is canceled.
Touch [OK].
Ready to Make Master
If the Recognition Screen is displayed, follow the
message on the screen. See step 2 in “Customizing the Default Settings”. ()p.165)
259
REG-ML_EN.book Page 260 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 5:19 PM
260
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement